JP2004061948A - Heat-developable photosensitive material and image forming method - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a heat-developable photosensitive material improving processing, raw preservation and image preservation after development, and to provide an image forming method using it. <P>SOLUTION: The heat developable photosensitive material has a photosensitive silver halide layer containing at least photosensitive silver halide, organic silver salt, a reducing agent for the organic silver salt and a binder, and a non-photosensitive layer on the same face of a supporter. The organic silver salt is non-photosensitive polyvalent silver carboxylic acid salt, whose molecular weight per one mol of silver is 410 or smaller, and the total film thicknesses of the photosensitive silver halide layer of the non-photosensitive layer is 5 μm or larger and 20 μm or smaller. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2004,JPO

Description

【００４４】
【化２】

【００４５】
【化３】

【００４６】
【化４】

【００４７】
【化５】

【００４８】
【化６】

【００４９】
【化７】

【００５０】
【化８】

【００５１】
【化９】

【００５２】
【化１０】

【００５３】
【化１１】

【００５４】
【化１２】

【００５５】
【化１３】

【００５６】
【化１４】

【００５７】
【化１５】

【００５８】
【化１６】

【００５９】
【化１７】

【００６０】
【化１８】

【００６１】
【化１９】

【００６２】
【化２０】

【００６３】
【化２１】

【００６４】
本発明における有機銀塩（多価カルボン酸銀塩）の形状としては特に制限はなく、針状、棒状、平板状、りん片状いずれでもよい。
本発明においてはりん片状の有機銀塩が好ましい。また、長軸と単軸の長さの比が５以下の短針状、直方体、立方体またはジャガイモ状の不定形粒子も好ましく用いられる。これらの有機銀粒子は長軸と単軸の長さの比が５以上の長針状粒子に比べて熱現像時のカブリが少ないという特徴を有している。特に、長軸と単軸の比が３以下の粒子は塗布膜の機械的安定性が向上し好ましい。本明細書において、りん片状の有機銀塩とは、次のようにして定義する。有機酸銀塩を電子顕微鏡で観察し、有機酸銀塩粒子の形状を直方体と近似し、この直方体の辺を一番短かい方からａ、ｂ、ｃとした（ｃはｂと同じであってもよい。）とき、短い方の数値ａ、ｂで計算し、次のようにしてｘを求める。
ｘ＝ｂ／ａ
このようにして２００個程度の粒子についてｘを求め、その平均値ｘ（平均）としたとき、ｘ（平均）≧１．５の関係を満たすものをりん片状とする。好ましくは３０≧ｘ（平均）≧１．５、より好ましくは１５≧ｘ（平均）≧１．５である。因みに針状とは１≦ｘ（平均）＜１．５である。
【００６５】
りん片状粒子において、ａはｂとｃを辺とする面を主平面とした平板状粒子の厚さとみることができる。ａの平均は０．０１μｍ以上０．３０μｍが好ましく０．１μｍ以上０．２３μｍ以下がより好ましい。ｃ／ｂの平均は好ましくは１以上６以下、より好ましくは１以上４以下、さらに好ましくは１以上３以下、特に好ましくは１以上２以下である。
【００６６】
有機銀塩の粒子サイズ分布は単分散であることが好ましい。単分散とは短軸、長軸それぞれの長さの標準偏差を短軸、長軸それぞれで割った値の１００分率が好ましくは１００％以下、より好ましくは８０％以下、更に好ましくは５０％以下である。有機銀塩の形状の測定方法としては有機銀塩分散物の透過型電子顕微鏡像より求めることができる。単分散性を測定する別の方法として、有機銀塩の体積加重平均直径の標準偏差を求める方法があり、体積加重平均直径で割った値の百分率（変動係数）が好ましくは１００％以下、より好ましくは８０％以下、更に好ましくは５０％以下である。測定方法としては例えば液中に分散した有機銀塩にレーザー光を照射し、その散乱光のゆらぎの時間変化に対する自己相関関数を求めることにより得られた粒子サイズ（体積加重平均直径）から求めることができる。
【００６７】
本発明に用いられる還元可能な有機銀塩の製造及びその分散法は、公知の方法等を適用することができる。例えば上記の特開平１０−６２８９９号、欧州特許公開第０８０３７６３Ａ１、欧州特許公開第０９６２８１２Ａ１号、特開平１１−３４９５９１号、特開２０００−７６８３号、同２０００−７２７１１号、特願平１１−３４８２２８〜３０号、同１１−２０３４１３号、特願２０００−９００９３号、同２０００−１９５６２１号、同２０００−１９１２２６号、同２０００−２１３８１３号、同２０００−２１４１５５号、同２０００−１９１２２６号等を参考にすることができる。
【００６８】
なお、還元可能な有機銀塩の分散時に、感光性銀塩を共存させると、カブリが上昇し、感度が著しく低下する場合があるため、分散時には感光性銀塩を実質的に含まないことがより好ましい。
本発明は、分散される水分散液中での感光性銀塩量は、その液中の還元可能な銀塩１ｍｏｌに対し０．１ｍｏｌ％以下であり、積極的な感光性銀塩の添加は行わないものである。
【００６９】
本発明において還元可能な有機銀塩水分散液と感光性銀塩水分散液を混合して感光材料を製造することが可能であるが、還元可能な銀塩と感光性銀塩の混合比率（モル比率）は目的に応じて選べるが、還元可能な銀塩に対する感光性銀塩の割合は１〜３０モル％の範囲が好ましく、更に３〜２０モル％、特に５〜１５モル％の範囲が好ましい。
混合する際に２種以上の還元可能な有機銀塩水分散液と２種以上の感光性銀塩水分散液を混合することは、写真特性の調節のために好ましく用いられる方法である。
【００７０】
本発明における還元可能な有機銀塩は所望の量で使用できるが、後述する感光性ハロゲン化銀との合計の銀量として０．１〜３ｇ／ｍ^２が好ましく、さらに好ましくは０．５〜１．９ｇ／ｍ^２である。
【００７１】
（還元剤）
本発明における感光性層は有機銀塩のための還元剤を含む。有機銀塩のための還元剤は、銀イオンを金属銀に還元する任意の物質（好ましくは有機物質）であってよい。このような還元剤の例は、特開平１１−６５０２１号の段落番号００４３〜００４５や、欧州特許公開第０８０３７６４Ａ１号の第７ページ第３４行〜第１８ページ第１２行に記載されている。
本発明において、還元剤としてはフェノール性水酸基のオルト位に置換基を有するいわゆるヒンダードフェノール系還元剤あるいはビスフェノール系還元剤が好ましく、下記一般式（Ｒ）で表される化合物がより好ましい。
【００７２】
【化２２】

【００７３】
一般式（Ｒ）において、Ｒ^１１およびＲ^１１’は各々独立に炭素数１〜２０のアルキル基を表す。Ｒ^１２およびＲ^１２’は各々独立に水素原子またはベンゼン環に置換可能な置換基を表す。Ｌは−Ｓ−基または−ＣＨＲ^１３−基を表す。Ｒ^１３は水素原子または炭素数１〜２０のアルキル基を表す。Ｘ^１およびＸ^１’は各々独立に水素原子またはベンゼン環に置換可能な基を表す。
【００７４】
一般式（Ｒ）について詳細に説明する。
一般式（Ｒ）において、Ｒ^１１およびＲ^１１’は各々独立に置換または無置換の炭素数１〜２０のアルキル基であり、アルキル基の置換基は特に限定されることはないが、好ましくは、アリール基、ヒドロキシ基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、アシルアミノ基、スルホンアミド基、スルホニル基、ホスホリル基、アシル基、カルバモイル基、エステル基、ウレイド基、ウレタン基、ハロゲン原子等があげられる。
【００７５】
一般式（Ｒ）において、Ｒ^１２およびＲ^１２’は各々独立に水素原子またはベンゼン環に置換可能な置換基であり、Ｘ^１およびＸ^１’も各々独立に水素原子またはベンゼン環に置換可能な基を表す。それぞれベンゼン環に置換可能な基としては、好ましくはアルキル基、アリール基、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基、アシルアミノ基があげられる。
【００７６】
一般式（Ｒ）において、Ｌは−Ｓ−基または−ＣＨＲ^１３−基を表す。Ｒ^１３は水素原子または炭素数１〜２０のアルキル基を表し、アルキル基は置換基を有していてもよい。Ｒ^１３の無置換のアルキル基の具体例はメチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、ヘプチル基、ウンデシル基、イソプロピル基、１−エチルペンチル基、２，４，４−トリメチルペンチル基などがあげられる。アルキル基の置換基の例はＲ^１１の置換基と同様の基があげられる。
【００７７】
一般式（Ｒ）において、Ｒ^１１およびＲ^１１’として好ましくは炭素数３〜１５の２級または３級のアルキル基であり、具体的にはイソプロピル基、イソブチル基、ｔ−ブチル基、ｔ−アミル基、ｔ−オクチル基、シクロヘキシル基、シクロペンチル基、１−メチルシクロヘキシル基、１−メチルシクロプロピル基などがあげられる。Ｒ^１１およびＲ^１１’としてより好ましくは炭素数４〜１２の３級アルキル基で、その中でもｔ−ブチル基、ｔ−アミル基、１−メチルシクロヘキシル基が更に好ましく、ｔ−ブチル基が最も好ましい。
【００７８】
一般式（Ｒ）において、Ｒ^１２およびＲ^１２’として好ましくは炭素数１〜２０のアルキル基であり、具体的にはメチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、イソプロピル基、ｔ−ブチル基、ｔ−アミル基、シクロヘキシル基、１−メチルシクロヘキシル基、ベンジル基、メトキシメチル基、メトキシエチル基などがあげられる。より好ましくはメチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ｔ−ブチル基である。
Ｘ^１およびＸ^１’は、好ましくは水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基で、より好ましくは水素原子である。
【００７９】
一般式（Ｒ）において、Ｌは好ましくは−ＣＨＲ^１３−基である。
Ｒ^１３として好ましくは水素原子または炭素数１〜１５のアルキル基であり、アルキル基としてはメチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、２，４，４−トリメチルペンチル基が好ましい。Ｒ^１３として特に好ましいのは水素原子、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基またはイソプロピル基である。
【００８０】
一般式（Ｒ）において、Ｒ^１３が水素原子である場合、Ｒ^１２およびＲ^１２’は好ましくは炭素数２〜５のアルキル基であり、エチル基、プロピル基がより好ましく、エチル基が最も好ましい。
Ｒ^１３が炭素数１〜８の１級または２級のアルキル基である場合、Ｒ^１２およびＲ^１２’はメチル基が好ましい。Ｒ^１３の炭素数１〜８の１級または２級のアルキル基としてはメチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基がより好ましく、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基が更に好ましい。
【００８１】
一般式（Ｒ）において、Ｒ^１１、Ｒ^１１’、Ｒ^１２およびＲ^１２’がいずれもメチル基である場合には、Ｒ^１３は２級のアルキル基であることが好ましい。この場合Ｒ^１３の２級アルキル基としてはイソプロピル基、イソブチル基、１−エチルペンチル基が好ましく、イソプロピル基がより好ましい。
上記還元剤はＲ^１１、Ｒ^１１’、Ｒ^１２、Ｒ^１２’およびＲ^１３の組み合わせにより、熱現像性、現像銀色調などが異なる。２種以上の還元剤を組み合わせることでこれらを調整することができるため、目的によっては２種以上を組み合わせて使用することが好ましい。
【００８２】
以下に本発明の一般式（Ｒ）で表される化合物をはじめとする本発明の還元剤の具体例を示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。
【００８３】
【化２３】

【００８４】
【化２４】

【００８５】
【化２５】

【００８６】
本発明において還元剤の添加量は０．１〜３．０ｇ／ｍ^２であることが好ましく、より好ましくは０．２〜１．５ｇ／ｍ^２で、さらに好ましくは０．３〜１．０ｇ／ｍ^２である。感光性層を有する面の銀１モルに対しては５〜５０％モル含まれることが好ましく、より好ましくは８〜３０モル％であり、１０〜２０モル％で含まれることがさらに好ましい。還元剤は感光性層に含有させることが好ましい。
【００８７】
還元剤は溶液形態、乳化分散形態、固体微粒子分散物形態など、いかなる方法で塗布液に含有せしめ、感光材料に含有させてもよい。
よく知られている乳化分散法としては、ジブチルフタレート、トリクレジルフォスフェート、グリセリルトリアセテートあるいはジエチルフタレートなどのオイル、酢酸エチルやシクロヘキサノンなどの補助溶媒を用いて溶解し、機械的に乳化分散物を作製する方法が挙げられる。
【００８８】
また、固体微粒子分散法としては、還元剤の粉末を水等の適当な溶媒中にボールミル、コロイドミル、振動ボールミル、サンドミル、ジェットミル、ローラーミルあるいは超音波によって分散し、固体分散物を作製する方法が挙げられる。尚、その際に保護コロイド（例えば、ポリビニルアルコール）、界面活性剤（例えばトリイソプロピルナフタレンスルホン酸ナトリウム（３つのイソプロピル基の置換位置が異なるものの混合物）などのアニオン性界面活性剤）を用いてもよい。上記ミル類では分散媒体としてジルコニア等のビーズが使われるのが普通であり、これらのビーズから溶出するＺｒ等が分散物中に混入することがある。分散条件にもよるが通常は１ｐｐｍ〜１０００ｐｐｍの範囲である。感材中のＺｒの含有量が銀１ｇ当たり０．５ｍｇ以下であれば実用上差し支えない。
水分散物には防腐剤（例えばベンゾイソチアゾリノンナトリウム塩）を含有させることが好ましい。
本発明においては還元剤は固体分散物として使用することが好ましい。
【００８９】
（現像促進剤）
本発明における感光性層には、現像促進剤として特開２０００−２６７２２２号明細書や特開２０００−３３０２３４号明細書等に記載の一般式（Ａ）で表されるスルホンアミドフェノール系の化合物、特開平２００１−９２０７５記載の一般式（ＩＩ）で表されるヒンダードフェノール系の化合物、特開平１０−６２８９５号明細書や特開平１１−１５１１６号明細書等に記載の一般式（Ｉ）、特願２００１−０７４２７８号明細書に記載の一般式（１）で表されるヒドラジン系の化合物、特願２０００−７６２４０号明細書に記載されている一般式（２）で表されるフェノール系またはナフトール系の化合物が好ましく用いられる。これらの現像促進剤は還元剤に対して０．１〜２０モル％の範囲で使用され、好ましくは０．５〜１０モル％の範囲で、より好ましくは１〜５モル％の範囲である。感材への導入方法は還元剤同様の方法があげられるが、特に固体分散物または乳化分散物として添加することが好ましい。乳化分散物として添加する場合、常温で固体である高沸点溶剤と低沸点の補助溶剤を使用して分散した乳化分散物として添加するか、もしくは高沸点溶剤を使用しない所謂オイルレス乳化分散物として添加することが好ましい。
【００９０】
本発明においては上記現像促進剤の中でも、特願２００１−０７４２７８号明細書に記載の一般式（１）で表されるヒドラジン系の化合物および特願２０００−７６２４０号明細書に記載されている一般式（２）で表されるフェノール系またはナフトール系の化合物が特に好ましい。
以下、本発明の現像促進剤の好ましい具体例を挙げる。本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。
【００９１】
【化２６】

【００９２】
（水素結合性化合物）
本発明における還元剤が芳香族性の水酸基（−ＯＨ）を有する場合、特に前述のビスフェノール類の場合には、これらの基と水素結合を形成することが可能な基を有する非還元性の化合物を併用することが好ましい。水酸基と水素結合を形成する基としては、ホスホリル基、スルホキシド基、スルホニル基、カルボニル基、アミド基、エステル基、ウレタン基、ウレイド基、３級アミノ基、含窒素芳香族基などが挙げられる。その中でも好ましいのはホスホリル基、スルホキシド基、アミド基（但し、＞Ｎ−Ｈ基を持たず、＞Ｎ−Ｒａ（ＲａはＨ以外の置換基）のようにブロックされている。）、ウレタン基（但し、＞Ｎ−Ｈ基を持たず、＞Ｎ−Ｒａ（ＲａはＨ以外の置換基）のようにブロックされている。）、ウレイド基（但し、＞Ｎ−Ｈ基を持たず、＞Ｎ−Ｒａ（ＲａはＨ以外の置換基）のようにブロックされている。）を有する化合物である。
本発明で、特に好ましい水素結合性の化合物は下記一般式（Ｄ）で表される化合物である。
【００９３】
【化２７】

【００９４】
一般式（Ｄ）において、Ｒ^２１ないしＲ^２３は各々独立にアルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アミノ基またはヘテロ環基を表し、これらの基は無置換であっても置換基を有していてもよい。Ｒ^２１ないしＲ^２３が置換基を有する場合の置換基としてはハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アミノ基、アシル基、アシルアミノ基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、スルホンアミド基、アシルオキシ基、オキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、スルファモイル基、スルホニル基、ホスホリル基などがあげられ、置換基として好ましいのはアルキル基またはアリール基でたとえばメチル基、エチル基、イソプロピル基、ｔ−ブチル基、ｔ−オクチル基、フェニル基、４−アルコキシフェニル基、４−アシルオキシフェニル基などがあげられる。
【００９５】
一般式（Ｄ）において、Ｒ^２１ないしＲ^２３のアルキル基としては具体的にはメチル基、エチル基、ブチル基、オクチル基、ドデシル基、イソプロピル基、ｔ−ブチル基、ｔ−アミル基、ｔ−オクチル基、シクロヘキシル基、１−メチルシクロヘキシル基、ベンジル基、フェネチル基、２−フェノキシプロピル基などがあげられる。アリール基としてはフェニル基、クレジル基、キシリル基、ナフチル基、４−ｔ−ブチルフェニル基、４−ｔ−オクチルフェニル基、４−アニシジル基、３，５−ジクロロフェニル基などが挙げられる。アルコキシ基としてはメトキシ基、エトキシ基、ブトキシ基、オクチルオキシ基、２−エチルヘキシルオキシ基、３，５，５−トリメチルヘキシルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロヘキシルオキシ基、４−メチルシクロヘキシルオキシ基、ベンジルオキシ基等が挙げられる。アリールオキシ基としてはフェノキシ基、クレジルオキシ基、イソプロピルフェノキシ基、４−ｔ−ブチルフェノキシ基、ナフトキシ基、ビフェニルオキシ基等が挙げられる。アミノ基としてはジメチルアミノ基、ジエチルアミノ基、ジブチルアミノ基、ジオクチルアミノ基、Ｎ−メチル−Ｎ−ヘキシルアミノ基、ジシクロヘキシルアミノ基、ジフェニルアミノ基、Ｎ−メチル−Ｎ−フェニルアミノ基等が挙げられる。
【００９６】
一般式（Ｄ）において、Ｒ^２１ないしＲ^２３としてはアルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基が好ましい。本発明の効果の点ではＲ^２１ないしＲ^２３のうち少なくとも一つ以上がアルキル基またはアリール基であることが好ましく、二つ以上がアルキル基またはアリール基であることがより好ましい。また、安価に入手する事ができるという点ではＲ^２１ないしＲ^２３が同一の基である場合が好ましい。
以下に本発明における一般式（Ｄ）の化合物をはじめとする水素結合性化合物の具体例を示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。
【００９７】
【化２８】

【００９８】
【化２９】

【００９９】
水素結合性化合物の具体例は上述の他に欧州特許１０９６３１０号明細書、特願２０００−２７０４９８号、同２００１−１２４７９６号に記載のものがあげられる。
本発明の一般式（Ｄ）の化合物は、還元剤と同様に溶液形態、乳化分散形態、固体分散微粒子分散物形態で塗布液に含有せしめ、感光材料中で使用することができるが、固体分散物として使用することが好ましい。本発明の化合物は、溶液状態でフェノール性水酸基、アミノ基を有する化合物と水素結合性の錯体を形成しており、還元剤と本発明の一般式（Ｄ）の化合物との組み合わせによっては錯体として結晶状態で単離することができる。このようにして単離した結晶粉体を固体分散微粒子分散物として使用することは安定した性能を得る上で特に好ましい。また、還元剤と本発明の一般式（Ｄ）の化合物を粉体で混合し、適当な分散剤を使って、サンドグラインダーミル等で分散時に錯形成させる方法も好ましく用いることができる。
本発明の一般式（Ｄ）の化合物は還元剤に対して、１〜２００モル％の範囲で使用することが好ましく、より好ましくは１０〜１５０モル％の範囲で、さらに好ましくは２０〜１００モル％の範囲である。
【０１００】
（ハロゲン化銀）
本発明における感光性層は感光性ハロゲン化銀を含有する。上記感光性ハロゲン化銀は、ハロゲン組成として特に制限はなく、塩化銀、塩臭化銀、臭化銀、ヨウ臭化銀、ヨウ塩臭化銀、ヨウ化銀を用いることができる。その中でも臭化銀およびヨウ臭化銀が好ましい。粒子内におけるハロゲン組成の分布は均一であってもよく、ハロゲン組成がステップ状に変化したものでもよく、或いは連続的に変化したものでもよい。また、コア／シェル構造を有するハロゲン化銀粒子を好ましく用いることができる。構造として好ましいものは２〜５重構造であり、より好ましくは２〜４重構造のコア／シェル粒子を用いることができる。また塩化銀、臭化銀または塩臭化銀粒子の表面に臭化銀やヨウ化銀を局在させる技術も好ましく用いることができる。
【０１０１】
感光性ハロゲン化銀の形成方法は当業界ではよく知られており、例えば、リサーチディスクロージャー１９７８年６月の第１７０２９号、および米国特許第３，７００，４５８号に記載されている方法を用いることができるが、具体的にはゼラチンあるいは他のポリマー溶液中に銀供給化合物及びハロゲン供給化合物を添加することにより感光性ハロゲン化銀を調製し、その後で有機銀塩と混合する方法を用いる。また、特開平１１−１１９３７４号公報の段落番号０２１７〜０２２４に記載されている方法、特願平１１−９８７０８号、特開２０００−３４７３３５号記載の方法も好ましい。
【０１０２】
感光性ハロゲン化銀の粒子サイズは、画像形成後の白濁を低く抑える目的のために小さいことが好ましく具体的には０．２０μｍ以下、より好ましくは０．０１μｍ以上０．１５μｍ以下、更に好ましくは０．０２μｍ以上０．１２μｍ以下がよい。ここでいう粒子サイズとは、ハロゲン化銀粒子の投影面積（平板粒子の場合は主平面の投影面積）と同面積の円像に換算したときの直径をいう。
【０１０３】
ハロゲン化銀粒子の形状としては立方体、八面体、平板状粒子、球状粒子、棒状粒子、ジャガイモ状粒子等を挙げることができるが、本発明においては特に立方体状粒子が好ましい。ハロゲン化銀粒子のコーナーが丸まった粒子も好ましく用いることができる。感光性ハロゲン化銀粒子の外表面の面指数（ミラー指数）については特に制限はないが、分光増感色素が吸着した場合の分光増感効率が高い｛１００｝面の占める割合が高いことが好ましい。その割合としては５０％以上が好ましく、６５％以上がより好ましく、８０％以上が更に好ましい。ミラー指数｛１００｝面の比率は増感色素の吸着における｛１１１｝面と｛１００｝面との吸着依存性を利用したＴ．Ｔａｎｉ；Ｊ．Ｉｍａｇｉｎｇ　Ｓｃｉ．，２９、１６５（１９８５年）に記載の方法により求めることができる。
【０１０４】
本発明においては、六シアノ金属錯体を粒子最表面に存在させたハロゲン化銀粒子が好ましい。六シアノ金属錯体としては、［Ｆｅ（ＣＮ）_６］^４−、［Ｆｅ（ＣＮ）_６］^３−、［Ｒｕ（ＣＮ）_６］^４−、［Ｏｓ（ＣＮ）_６］^４−、［Ｃｏ（ＣＮ）_６］^３−、［Ｒｈ（ＣＮ）_６］^３−、［Ｉｒ　（ＣＮ）_６］^３−、［Ｃｒ（ＣＮ）_６］^３−、［Ｒｅ（ＣＮ）_６］^３−などが挙げられる。本発明においては六シアノＦｅ錯体が好ましい。
【０１０５】
六シアノ金属錯体は、水溶液中でイオンの形で存在するので対陽イオンは重要ではないが、水と混和しやすく、ハロゲン化銀乳剤の沈澱操作に適合しているナトリウムイオン、カリウムイオン、ルビジウムイオン、セシウムイオンおよびリチウムイオン等のアルカリ金属イオン、アンモニウムイオン、アルキルアンモニウムイオン（例えばテトラメチルアンモニウムイオン、テトラエチルアンモニウムイオン、テトラプロピルアンモニウムイオン、テトラ（ｎ−ブチル）アンモニウムイオン）を用いることが好ましい。
【０１０６】
六シアノ金属錯体は、水の他に水と混和しうる適当な有機溶媒（例えば、アルコール類、エーテル類、グリコール類、ケトン類、エステル類、アミド類等）との混合溶媒やゼラチンと混和して添加することができる。
【０１０７】
六シアノ金属錯体の添加量は、銀１モル当たり１×１０^−５モル以上１×１０^−２モル以下が好ましく、より好ましくは１×１０^−４モル以上１×１０^−３モル以下である。
【０１０８】
六シアノ金属錯体をハロゲン化銀粒子最表面に存在させるには、六シアノ金属錯体を、粒子形成に使用する硝酸銀水溶液を添加終了した後、硫黄増感、セレン増感およびテルル増感のカルコゲン増感や金増感等の貴金属増感を行う化学増感工程の前までの仕込工程終了前、水洗工程中、分散工程中、または化学増感工程前に直接添加する。ハロゲン化銀微粒子を成長させないためには、粒子形成後速やかに六シアノ金属錯体を添加することが好ましく、仕込工程終了前に添加することが好ましい。
【０１０９】
尚、六シアノ金属錯体の添加は、粒子形成をするために添加する硝酸銀の総量の９６質量％を添加した後から開始してもよく、９８質量％添加した後から開始するのがより好ましく、９９質量％添加した後が特に好ましい。
【０１１０】
これら六シアノ金属錯体を粒子形成の完了する直前の硝酸銀水溶液を添加した後に添加すると、ハロゲン化銀粒子最表面に吸着することができ、そのほとんどが粒子表面の銀イオンと難溶性の塩を形成する。この六シアノ鉄（ＩＩ）の銀塩は、ＡｇＩよりも難溶性の塩であるため、微粒子による再溶解を防ぐことができ、粒子サイズが小さいハロゲン化銀微粒子を製造することが可能となった。
【０１１１】
本発明における感光性ハロゲン化銀粒子は、周期律表（第１〜１８族までを示す）の第８族〜第１０族の金属または金属錯体を含有することができる。周期律表の第８族〜第１０族の金属または金属錯体の中心金属として好ましくは、ロジウム、ルテニウム、イリジウムである。これら金属錯体は１種類でもよいし、同種金属及び異種金属の錯体を２種以上併用してもよい。好ましい含有率は銀１モルに対し１×１０^−９モルから１×１０^−３モルの範囲が好ましい。これらの重金属や金属錯体及びそれらの添加法については特開平７−２２５４４９号、特開平１１−６５０２１号段落番号００１８〜００２４、特開平１１−１１９３７４号段落番号０２２７〜０２４０に記載されている。
【０１１２】
さらに本発明に用いられるハロゲン化銀粒子に含有することのできる金属原子（例えば［Ｆｅ（ＣＮ）_６］^４−）、ハロゲン化銀乳剤の脱塩法や化学増感法については特開平１１−８４５７４号段落番号００４６〜００５０、特開平１１−６５０２１号段落番号００２５〜００３１、特開平１１−１１９３７４号段落番号０２４２〜０２５０に記載されている。
【０１１３】
本発明に用いる感光性ハロゲン化銀乳剤に含有されるゼラチンとしては、種々のゼラチンが使用することができる。感光性ハロゲン化銀乳剤の有機銀塩含有塗布液中での分散状態を良好に維持することが必要であり、分子量は、１０，０００〜１，０００，０００のゼラチンを使用することが好ましい。また、ゼラチンの置換基をフタル化処理することも好ましい。これらのゼラチンは粒子形成時あるいは脱塩処理後の分散時に使用してもよいが、粒子形成時に使用することが好ましい。
【０１１４】
本発明に適用できる増感色素としてはハロゲン化銀粒子に吸着した際、所望の波長領域でハロゲン化銀粒子を分光増感できるもので、露光光源の分光特性に適した分光感度を有する増感色素を有利に選択することができる。増感色素及び添加法については、特開平１１−６５０２１号の段落番号０１０３〜０１０９、特開平１０−１８６５７２号一般式（ＩＩ）で表される化合物、特開平１１−１１９３７４号の一般式（Ｉ）で表される色素及び段落番号０１０６、米国特許第５，５１０，２３６号、同第３，８７１，８８７号実施例５に記載の色素、特開平２−９６１３１号、特開昭５９−４８７５３号に開示されている色素、欧州特許公開第０８０３７６４Ａ１号の第１９ページ第３８行〜第２０ページ第３５行、特願２０００−８６８６５号、特願２０００−１０２５６０号、特願２０００−２０５３９９号等に記載されている。これらの増感色素は単独で用いてもよく、２種以上組合せて用いてもよい。本発明において増感色素をハロゲン化銀乳剤中に添加する時期は、脱塩工程後、塗布までの時期が好ましく、より好ましくは脱塩後から化学熟成が終了する前までの時期である。
本発明における増感色素の添加量は、感度やカブリの性能に合わせて所望の量にすることができるが、感光性層のハロゲン化銀１モル当たり１０^−６〜１モルが好ましく、さらに好ましくは１０^−４〜１０^−１モルである。
【０１１５】
本発明は分光増感効率を向上させるため、強色増感剤を用いることができる。本発明に用いる強色増感剤としては、欧州特許公開第５８７，３３８号、米国特許第３，８７７，９４３号、同第４，８７３，１８４号、特開平５−３４１４３２号、同１１−１０９５４７号、同１０−１１１５４３号等に記載の化合物が挙げられる。
【０１１６】
本発明における感光性ハロゲン化銀粒子は、硫黄増感法、セレン増感法もしくはテルル増感法にて化学増感されていることが好ましい。硫黄増感法、セレン増感法、テルル増感法に好ましく用いられる化合物としては公知の化合物、例えば、特開平７−１２８７６８号等に記載の化合物等を使用することができる。特に本発明においてはテルル増感が好ましく、特開平１１−６５０２１号段落番号００３０に記載の文献に記載の化合物、特開平５−３１３２８４号中の一般式（ＩＩ），（ＩＩＩ），（ＩＶ）で示される化合物がより好ましい。
【０１１７】
本発明における感光性ハロゲン化銀粒子は、上記カルコゲン増感と組み合わせて、あるいは単独で金増感法にて化学増感されていることが好ましい。金増感剤としては、金の価数が＋１価または＋３価が好ましく、金増感剤としては通常用いられる金化合物が好ましい。代表的な例としては塩化金酸、臭化金酸、カリウムクロロオーレート、カリウムブロロオーレート、オーリックトリクロライド、カリウムオーリックチオシアネート、カリウムヨードオーレート、テトラシアノオーリックアシド、アンモニウムオーロチオシアネート、ピリジルトリクロロゴールドなどが好ましい。また、米国特許第５８５８６３７号、特願２００１−７９４５０号に記載の金増感剤も好ましく用いられる。
【０１１８】
本発明においては、化学増感は粒子形成後で塗布前であればいかなる時期でも可能であり、脱塩後、（１）分光増感前、（２）分光増感と同時、（３）分光増感後、（４）塗布直前等があり得る。
本発明で用いられる硫黄、セレンおよびテルル増感剤の使用量は、使用するハロゲン化銀粒子、化学熟成条件等によって変わるが、ハロゲン化銀１モル当たり１０^−８〜１０^−２モル、好ましくは１０^−７〜１０^−３モル程度を用いる。
金増感剤の添加量は種々の条件により異なるが、目安としてはハロゲン化銀１モル当たり１０^−７モルから１０^−３モル、より好ましくは１０^−６モル〜５×１０^−４モルである。
本発明における化学増感の条件としては特に制限はないが、ｐＨとしては５〜８、ｐＡｇとしては６〜１１、温度としては４０〜９５℃程度である。
本発明で用いるハロゲン化銀乳剤には、欧州特許公開第２９３，９１７号公報に示される方法により、チオスルホン酸化合物を添加してもよい。
【０１１９】
本発明における感光性ハロゲン化銀粒子は、還元剤を用いることが好ましい。還元増感法の具体的な化合物としてはアスコルビン酸、二酸化チオ尿素が好ましく、その他に塩化第一スズ、アミノイミノメタンスルフィン酸、ヒドラジン誘導体、ボラン化合物、シラン化合物、ポリアミン化合物等を用いることが好ましい。還元増感剤の添加は、結晶成長から塗布直前の調製工程までの感光乳剤製造工程のどの過程でもよい。また、乳剤のｐＨを７以上またはｐＡｇを８．３以下に保持して熟成することにより還元増感することが好ましく、粒子形成中に銀イオンのシングルアディション部分を導入することにより還元増感することも好ましい。
【０１２０】
本発明における感光性ハロゲン化銀乳剤は、１光子で２電子を発生させる化合物としてＦＥＤ増感剤（Ｆｒａｇｍｅｎｔａｂｌｅ　ｅｌｅｃｔｒｏｎ　ｄｏｎａｔｉｎｇ　ｓｅｎｓｉｔａｉｚｅｒ）を含有することが好ましい。ＦＥＤ増感剤としては、米国特許第５７４７２３５号、同５７４７２３６、同６０５４２６０号、同５９９４０５１号、特願２００１−８６１６１号に記載の化合物が好ましい。ＦＥＤ増感剤の添加する工程としては結晶成長から塗布直前の調製工程までの感光乳剤製造工程のどの過程でも好ましい。添加量としては、種々の条件により異なるが、目安としてはハロゲン化銀１モル当たり１０^−７モルから１０^−１モル、より好ましくは１０^−６モル〜５×１０^−２モルである。
【０１２１】
本発明に用いられる感光材料中の感光性ハロゲン化銀乳剤は、一種だけでもよいし、二種以上（例えば、平均粒子サイズの異なるもの、ハロゲン組成の異なるもの、晶癖の異なるもの、化学増感の条件の異なるもの）併用してもよい。感度の異なる感光性ハロゲン化銀を複数種用いることで階調を調節することができる。これらに関する技術としては特開昭５７−１１９３４１号、同５３−１０６１２５号、同４７−３９２９号、同４８−５５７３０号、同４６−５１８７号、同５０−７３６２７号、同５７−１５０８４１号などが挙げられる。感度差としてはそれぞれの乳剤で０．２ｌｏｇＥ以上の差を持たせることが好ましい。
【０１２２】
感光性ハロゲン化銀の添加量は、感光材料１ｍ^２当たりの塗布銀量で示して、０．０３〜０．６ｇ／ｍ^２であることが好ましく、０．０５〜０．４ｇ／ｍ^２であることがさらに好ましく、０．０７〜０．３ｇ／ｍ^２であることが最も好ましく、有機銀塩１モルに対しては、感光性ハロゲン化銀は０．０１モル以上０．５モル以下が好ましく、より好ましくは０．０２モル以上０．３モル以下、さらに好ましくは０．０３モル以上０．２モル以下である。
【０１２３】
別々に調製した感光性ハロゲン化銀と有機銀塩の混合方法及び混合条件については、それぞれ調製終了したハロゲン化銀粒子と有機銀塩を高速撹拌機やボールミル、サンドミル、コロイドミル、振動ミル、ホモジナイザー等で混合する方法や、あるいは有機銀塩の調製中のいずれかのタイミングで調製終了した感光性ハロゲン化銀を混合して有機銀塩を調製する方法等があるが、本発明の効果が十分に現れる限りにおいては特に制限はない。また、混合する際に２種以上の有機銀塩水分散液と２種以上の感光性銀塩水分散液を混合することは、写真特性の調節のために好ましい方法である。
【０１２４】
本発明におけるハロゲン化銀の感光性層塗布液中への好ましい添加時期は、塗布する１８０分前から直前、好ましくは６０分前から１０秒前であるが、混合方法及び混合条件については本発明の効果が十分に現れる限りにおいては特に制限はない。具体的な混合方法としては添加流量とコーターへの送液量から計算した平均滞留時間を所望の時間となるようにしたタンクでの混合する方法やＮ．Ｈａｒｎｂｙ、Ｍ．Ｆ．Ｅｄｗａｒｄｓ、Ａ．Ｗ．Ｎｉｅｎｏｗ著、高橋幸司訳”液体混合技術”（日刊工業新聞社刊、１９８９年）の第８章等に記載されているスタチックミキサーなどを使用する方法がある。
【０１２５】
（バインダー）
本発明の有機銀塩含有層のバインダーはいかなるポリマーを使用してもよく、好適なバインダーは透明又は半透明で、一般に無色であり、天然樹脂やポリマー及びコポリマー、合成樹脂やポリマー及びコポリマー、その他フィルムを形成する媒体、例えば、ゼラチン類、ゴム類、ポリ（ビニルアルコール）類、ヒドロキシエチルセルロース類、セルロースアセテート類、セルロースアセテートブチレート類、ポリ（ビニルピロリドン）類、カゼイン、デンプン、ポリ（アクリル酸）類、ポリ（メチルメタクリル酸）類、ポリ（塩化ビニル）類、ポリ（メタクリル酸）類、スチレン−無水マレイン酸共重合体類、スチレン−アクリロニトリル共重合体類、スチレン−ブタジエン共重合体類、ポリ（ビニルアセタール）類（例えば、ポリ（ビニルホルマール）及びポリ（ビニルブチラール））、ポリ（エステル）類、ポリ（ウレタン）類、フェノキシ樹脂、ポリ（塩化ビニリデン）類、ポリ（エポキシド）類、ポリ（カーボネート）類、ポリ（酢酸ビニル）類、ポリ（オレフィン）類、セルロースエステル類、ポリ（アミド）類がある。バインダーは水又は有機溶媒またはエマルションから被覆形成してもよい。
【０１２６】
本発明では、有機銀塩を含有する層に併用できるバインダーのガラス転移温度は−２０℃以上８０℃以下である（以下、高Ｔｇバインダーということあり）ことが好ましく、０℃以上７０℃以下であることがより好ましく、１０℃以上６５℃以下であることが更に好ましい。
【０１２７】
なお、本明細書においてＴｇは下記の式で計算した。
１／Ｔｇ＝Σ（Ｘｉ／Ｔｇｉ）
ここでは、ポリマーはｉ＝１からｎまでのｎ個のモノマー成分が共重合しているとする。Ｘｉはｉ番目のモノマーの重量分率（ΣＸｉ＝１）、　Ｔｇｉはｉ番目のモノマーの単独重合体のガラス転移温度（絶対温度）である。ただしΣはｉ＝１からｎまでの和をとる。尚、各モノマーの単独重合体ガラス転移温度の値（Ｔｇｉ）はＰｏｌｙｍｅｒ　Ｈａｎｄｂｏｏｋ（３ｒｄ　Ｅｄｉｔｉｏｎ）（Ｊ．Ｂｒａｎｄｒｕｐ，　Ｅ．Ｈ．Ｉｍｍｅｒｇｕｔ著（Ｗｉｌｅｙ−Ｉｎｔｅｒｓｃｉｅｎｃｅ、１９８９））の値を採用した。
【０１２８】
バインダーは必要に応じて２種以上を併用してもよい。また、ガラス転移温度が２０℃以上のものとガラス転移温度が２０℃未満のものを組み合わせて用いてもよい。Ｔｇの異なるポリマーを２種以上ブレンドして使用する場合には、その重量（質量）平均Ｔｇが上記の範囲にはいることが好ましい。
【０１２９】
本発明においては、有機銀塩含有層が溶媒の３０質量％以上が水である塗布液を用いて塗布、乾燥して被膜を形成させることが好ましい。
本発明においては、有機銀塩含有層が溶媒の３０質量％以上が水である塗布液を用いて塗布し、乾燥して形成される場合に、さらに有機銀塩含有層のバインダーが水系溶媒（水溶媒）に可溶または分散可能である場合に、特に２５℃６０％での平衡含水率が２質量％以下のポリマーのラテックスからなる場合に性能が向上する。最も好ましい形態は、イオン伝導度が２．５ｍＳ／ｃｍ以下になるように調製されたものであり、このような調製法としてポリマー合成後分離機能膜を用いて精製処理する方法が挙げられる。
【０１３０】
ここでいう前記ポリマーが可溶または分散可能である水系溶媒とは、水または水に７０質量％以下の水混和性の有機溶媒を混合したものである。水混和性の有機溶媒としては、例えば、メチルアルコール、エチルアルコール、プロピルアルコール等のアルコール系、メチルセロソルブ、エチルセロソルブ、ブチルセロソルブ等のセロソルブ系、酢酸エチル、ジメチルホルミアミドなどを挙げることができる。
【０１３１】
また「２５℃６０％における平衡含水率」とは、２５℃６０％の雰囲気下で調湿平衡にあるポリマーの重量Ｗ１と２５℃で絶乾状態にあるポリマーの重量Ｗ０を用いて以下のように表すことができる。
２５℃６０％における平衡含水率＝｛（Ｗ１−Ｗ０）／Ｗ０｝×１００（質量％）
【０１３２】
含水率の定義と測定法については、例えば高分子工学講座１４、高分子材料試験法（高分子学会編、地人書館）を参考にすることができる。
【０１３３】
本発明のバインダーポリマーの２５℃６０％における平衡含水率は２質量％以下であることが好ましいが、より好ましくは０．０１質量％以上１．５質量％以下、さらに好ましくは０．０２質量％以上１質量％以下が望ましい。
【０１３４】
本発明においては水系溶媒に分散可能なポリマーが特に好ましい。分散状態の例としては、水不溶な疎水性ポリマーの微粒子が分散しているラテックスやポリマー分子が分子状態またはミセルを形成して分散しているものなどいずれでもよいが、ラッテクス分散した粒子がより好ましい。分散粒子の平均粒径は１〜５００００ｎｍ、好ましくは５〜１０００ｎｍの範囲で、より好ましくは１０〜５００ｎｍの範囲、さらに好ましくは５０〜２００ｎｍの範囲である。分散粒子の粒径分布に関しては特に制限は無く、広い粒径分布を持つものでも単分散の粒径分布を持つものでもよい。単分散の粒径分布を持つものを２種以上混合して使用することも塗布液の物性を制御する上で好ましい使用法である。
【０１３５】
本発明において水系溶媒に分散可能なポリマーの好ましい態様としては、アクリル系ポリマー、ポリ（エステル）類、ゴム類（例えばＳＢＲ樹脂）、ポリ（ウレタン）類、ポリ（塩化ビニル）類、ポリ（酢酸ビニル）類、ポリ（塩化ビニリデン）類、ポリ（オレフィン）類等の疎水性ポリマーを好ましく用いることができる。これらポリマーとしては直鎖のポリマーでも枝分かれしたポリマーでもまた架橋されたポリマーでもよいし、単一のモノマーが重合したいわゆるホモポリマーでもよいし、２種類以上のモノマーが重合したコポリマーでもよい。コポリマーの場合はランダムコポリマーでも、ブロックコポリマーでもよい。これらポリマーの分子量は数平均分子量で５０００〜１００００００、好ましくは１００００〜２０００００がよい。分子量が小さすぎるものは乳剤層の力学強度が不十分であり、大きすぎるものは成膜性が悪く好ましくない。また、架橋性のポリマーラッテクスは特に好ましく使用される。
【０１３６】
（ラテックスの具体例）
好ましいポリマーラテックスの具体例としては以下のものを挙げることができる。以下では原料モノマーを用いて表し、括弧内の数値は質量％、分子量は数平均分子量である。多官能モノマーを使用した場合は架橋構造を作るため分子量の概念が適用できないので架橋性と記載し、分子量の記載を省略した。Ｔｇはガラス転移温度を表す。
【０１３７】
Ｐ−１；−ＭＭＡ（７０）−ＥＡ（２７）−ＭＡＡ（３）−のラテックス（分子量３７０００、Ｔｇ６１℃）
Ｐ−２；−ＭＭＡ（７０）−２ＥＨＡ（２０）−Ｓｔ（５）−ＡＡ（５）−のラテックス（分子量４００００、Ｔｇ５９℃）
Ｐ−３；−Ｓｔ（５０）−Ｂｕ（４７）−ＭＡＡ（３）−のラテックス（架橋性、Ｔｇ−１７℃）
Ｐ−４；−Ｓｔ（６８）−Ｂｕ（２９）−ＡＡ（３）−のラテックス（架橋性、Ｔｇ１７℃）
Ｐ−５；−Ｓｔ（７１）−Ｂｕ（２６）−ＡＡ（３）−のラテックス（架橋性，Ｔｇ２４℃）
Ｐ−６；−Ｓｔ（７０）−Ｂｕ（２７）−ＩＡ（３）−のラテックス（架橋性）
Ｐ−７；−Ｓｔ（７５）−Ｂｕ（２４）−ＡＡ（１）−のラテックス（架橋性、Ｔｇ２９℃）
Ｐ−８；−Ｓｔ（６０）−Ｂｕ（３５）−ＤＶＢ（３）−ＭＡＡ（２）−のラテックス（架橋性）
Ｐ−９；−Ｓｔ（７０）−Ｂｕ（２５）−ＤＶＢ（２）−ＡＡ（３）−のラテックス（架橋性）
Ｐ−１０；−ＶＣ（５０）−ＭＭＡ（２０）−ＥＡ（２０）−ＡＮ（５）−ＡＡ（５）−のラテックス（分子量８００００）
Ｐ−１１；−ＶＤＣ（８５）−ＭＭＡ（５）−ＥＡ（５）−ＭＡＡ（５）−のラテックス（分子量６７０００）
Ｐ−１２；−Ｅｔ（９０）−ＭＡＡ（１０）−のラテックス（分子量１２０００）
Ｐ−１３；−Ｓｔ（７０）−２ＥＨＡ（２７）−ＡＡ（３）のラテックス（分子量１３００００、Ｔｇ４３℃）
Ｐ−１４；−ＭＭＡ（６３）−ＥＡ（３５）−　ＡＡ（２）のラテックス（分子量３３０００、Ｔｇ４７℃）
Ｐ−１５；−Ｓｔ（７０．５）−Ｂｕ（２６．５）−ＡＡ（３）−のラテックス（架橋性，Ｔｇ２３℃）
Ｐ−１６；−Ｓｔ（６９．５）−Ｂｕ（２７．５）−ＡＡ（３）−のラテックス（架橋性，Ｔｇ２０．５℃）
【０１３８】
上記構造の略号は以下のモノマーを表す。ＭＭＡ；メチルメタクリレート，ＥＡ　；エチルアクリレート、ＭＡＡ；メタクリル酸，２ＥＨＡ；２−エチルヘキシルアクリレート，Ｓｔ；スチレン，Ｂｕ；ブタジエン，ＡＡ；アクリル酸，ＤＶＢ；ジビニルベンゼン，ＶＣ；塩化ビニル，ＡＮ；アクリロニトリル，ＶＤＣ；塩化ビニリデン，Ｅｔ；エチレン，ＩＡ；イタコン酸。
【０１３９】
以上に記載したポリマーラテックスは市販もされていて、以下のようなポリマーが利用できる。アクリル系ポリマーの例としては、セビアンＡ−４６３５，４７１８，４６０１（以上ダイセル化学工業（株）製）、Ｎｉｐｏｌ　Ｌｘ８１１、８１４、８２１、８２０、８５７（以上日本ゼオン（株）製）など、ポリ（エステル）類の例としては、ＦＩＮＥＴＥＸ　ＥＳ６５０、６１１、６７５、８５０（以上大日本インキ化学（株）製）、ＷＤ−ｓｉｚｅ、ＷＭＳ（以上イーストマンケミカル製）など、ポリ（ウレタン）類の例としては、ＨＹＤＲＡＮ　ＡＰ１０、２０、３０、４０（以上大日本インキ化学（株）製）など、ゴム類の例としては、ＬＡＣＳＴＡＲ　７３１０Ｋ、３３０７Ｂ、４７００Ｈ、７１３２Ｃ（以　上大日本インキ化学（株）製）、Ｎｉｐｏｌ　Ｌｘ４１６、４１０、４３８Ｃ、２５０７（以上日本ゼオン（株）製）など、ポリ（塩化ビニル）類の例としては、Ｇ３５１、Ｇ５７６（以上日本ゼオン（株）製）など、ポリ（塩化ビニリデン）類の例としては、Ｌ５０２、Ｌ５１３（以上旭化成工業（株）製）など、ポリ（オレフィン）類の例としては、ケミパールＳ１２０、ＳＡ１００（以上三井石油化学（株）製）などを挙げることができる。
【０１４０】
これらのポリマーラテックスは単独で用いてもよいし、必要に応じて２種以上ブレンドしてもよい。
【０１４１】
（好ましいラテックス）
本発明に用いられるポリマーラテックスとしては、特に、スチレン−ブタジエン共重合体のラテックスが好ましい。スチレン−ブタジエン共重合体におけるスチレンのモノマー単位とブタジエンのモノマー単位との重量比は４０：６０〜９５：５であることが好ましい。また、スチレンのモノマー単位とブタジエンのモノマー単位との共重合体に占める割合は６０〜９９質量％であることが好ましい。また、本発明のポリマーラッテクスはアクリル酸またはメタクリル酸をスチレンとブタジエンの和に対して１〜６質量％含有することが好ましく、より好ましくは２〜５質量％含有する。本発明のポリマーラテックスはアクリル酸を含有することが好ましい。
【０１４２】
本発明に用いることが好ましいスチレン−ブタジエン酸共重合体のラテックスとしては、前記のＰ−３〜Ｐ−８，１５、市販品であるＬＡＣＳＴＡＲ−３３０７Ｂ、７１３２Ｃ、Ｎｉｐｏｌ　Ｌｘ４１６等が挙げられる。
【０１４３】
本発明の感光材料の有機銀塩含有層には必要に応じてゼラチン、ポリビニルアルコール、メチルセルロース、ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース、カルボキシメチルセルロースなどの親水性ポリマーを添加してもよい。これらの親水性ポリマーの添加量は有機銀塩含有層の全バインダーの３０質量％以下、より好ましくは２０質量％以下が好ましい。
【０１４４】
本発明の有機銀塩含有層（即ち、感光性層）は、ポリマーラテックスを用いて形成されたものが好ましい。有機銀塩含有層のバインダーの量は、全バインダー／有機銀塩の重量比が１／１０〜１０／１、より好ましくは１／３〜５／１の範囲、さらに好ましくは１／１〜３／１の範囲である。
【０１４５】
また、このような有機銀塩含有層は、通常、感光性銀塩である感光性ハロゲン化銀が含有された感光性層（乳剤層）でもあり、このような場合の、全バインダー／ハロゲン化銀の重量比は４００〜５、より好ましくは２００〜１０の範囲である。
【０１４６】
本発明における感光性層の全バインダー量は好ましくは０．２〜３０ｇ／ｍ^２、より好ましくは１〜１５ｇ／ｍ^２、さらに好ましくは２〜１０ｇ／ｍ^２の範囲である。本発明における感光性層には架橋のための架橋剤、塗布性改良のための界面活性剤などを添加してもよい。
【０１４７】
（好ましい塗布液の溶媒）
本発明において感光材料の有機銀塩含有層塗布液の溶媒（ここでは簡単のため、溶媒と分散媒をあわせて溶媒と表す。）は、水を３０質量％以上含む水系溶媒が好ましい。水以外の成分としてはメチルアルコール、エチルアルコール、イソプロピルアルコール、メチルセロソルブ、エチルセロソルブ、ジメチルホルムアミド、酢酸エチルなど任意の水混和性有機溶媒を用いてよい。塗布液の溶媒の水含有率は５０質量％以上、より好ましくは７０質量％以上が好ましい。好ましい溶媒組成の例を挙げると、水の他、水／メチルアルコール＝９０／１０、水／メチルアルコール＝７０／３０、水／メチルアルコール／ジメチルホルムアミド＝８０／１５／５、水／メチルアルコール／エチルセロソルブ＝８５／１０／５、水／メチルアルコール／イソプロピルアルコール＝８５／１０／５などがある（数値は質量％）。
【０１４８】
（カブリ防止剤）
本発明に用いることのできるカブリ防止剤、安定剤および安定剤前駆体は特開平１０−６２８９９号の段落番号００７０、欧州特許公開第０８０３７６４Ａ１号の第２０頁第５７行〜第２１頁第７行に記載の特許のもの、特開平９−２８１６３７号、同９−３２９８６４号記載の化合物、米国特許６，０８３，６８１号、同６，０８３，６８１号、欧州特許１０４８９７５号に記載の化合物が挙げられる。また、本発明に好ましく用いられるカブリ防止剤は有機ハロゲン化物であり、これらについては、特開平１１−６５０２１号の段落番号０１１１〜０１１２に記載の特許に開示されているものが挙げられる。特に特開２０００−２８４３９９号の式（Ｐ）で表される有機ハロゲン化合物、特開平１０−３３９９３４号の一般式（ＩＩ）で表される有機ポリハロゲン化合物、特開２００１−３１６４４号および特開２００１−３３９１１号に記載の有機ポリハロゲン化合物が好ましい。
【０１４９】
（ポリハロゲン化合物の説明）
以下、本発明で好ましい有機ポリハロゲン化合物について具体的に説明する。本発明の好ましいポリハロゲン化合物は下記一般式（Ｈ）で表される化合物である。
一般式（Ｈ）
Ｑ−（Ｙ）ｎ−Ｃ（Ｚ_１）（Ｚ_２）Ｘ
一般式（Ｈ）において、Ｑはアルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロ環基を表し、Ｙは２価の連結基を表し、ｎは０または１を表し、Ｚ_１およびＺ_２はハロゲン原子を表し、Ｘは水素原子または電子吸引性基を表す。
一般式（Ｈ）においてＱは好ましくはアリール基またはヘテロ環基である。
一般式（Ｈ）において、Ｑがヘテロ環基である場合、窒素原子を１ないし２含有する含窒素ヘテロ環基が好ましく、２−ピリジル基、２−キノリル基が特に好ましい。
【０１５０】
一般式（Ｈ）において、Ｑがアリール基である場合、Ｑは好ましくはハメットの置換基定数σｐが正の値をとる電子吸引性基で置換されたフェニル基を表す。ハメットの置換基定数に関しては、Ｊｏｕｒｎａｌ　ｏｆ　ＭｅｄｉｃｉｎａｌＣｈｅｍｉｓｔｒｙ，１９７３，Ｖｏｌ．１６，Ｎｏ．１１，１２０７−１２１６　等を参考にすることができる。このような電子吸引性基としては、例えばハロゲン原子（フッ素原子（σｐ値：０．０６）、塩素原子（σｐ値：０．２３）、臭素原子（σｐ値：０．２３）、ヨウ素原子（σｐ値：０．１８））、トリハロメチル基（トリブロモメチル（σｐ値：０．２９）、トリクロロメチル（σｐ値：０．３３）、トリフルオロメチル（σｐ値：０．５４））、シアノ基（σｐ値：０．６６）、ニトロ基（σｐ値：０．７８）、脂肪族・アリールもしくは複素環スルホニル基（例えば、メタンスルホニル（σｐ値：０．７２））、脂肪族・アリールもしくは複素環アシル基（例えば、アセチル（σｐ値：０．５０）、ベンゾイル（σｐ値：０．４３））、アルキニル基（例えば、Ｃ≡ＣＨ（σｐ値：０．２３））、脂肪族・アリールもしくは複素環オキシカルボニル基（例えば、メトキシカルボニル（σｐ値：０．４５）、フェノキシカルボニル（σｐ値：０．４４））、カルバモイル基（σｐ値：０．３６）、スルファモイル基（σｐ値：０．５７）、スルホキシド基、ヘテロ環基、ホスホリル基等があげられる。σｐ値としては好ましくは０．２〜２．０の範囲で、より好ましくは０．４から１．０の範囲である。電子吸引性基として特に好ましいのは、カルバモイル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アルキルホスホリル基で、なかでもカルバモイル基が最も好ましい。
【０１５１】
一般式（Ｈ）において、Ｘは好ましくは電子吸引性基であり、より好ましくはハロゲン原子、脂肪族・アリールもしくは複素環スルホニル基、脂肪族・アリールもしくは複素環アシル基、脂肪族・アリールもしくは複素環オキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、スルファモイル基であり、特に好ましくはハロゲン原子である。ハロゲン原子の中でも、好ましくは塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子であり、更に好ましくは塩素原子、臭素原子であり、特に好ましくは臭素原子である。
Ｙは好ましくは−Ｃ（＝Ｏ）−、−ＳＯ−または−ＳＯ_２−を表し、より好ましくは−Ｃ（＝Ｏ）−、−ＳＯ_２−であり、特に好ましくは−ＳＯ_２−である。ｎは、０または１を表し、好ましくは１である。
以下に本発明の一般式（Ｈ）の化合物の具体例を示す。
【０１５２】
【化３０】

【０１５３】
【化３１】

【０１５４】
本発明の一般式（Ｈ）で表される化合物は感光性層の有機銀塩１モルあたり、１０^−４〜１モルの範囲で使用することが好ましく、より好ましくは１０^−３〜０．５モルの範囲で、さらに好ましくは１×１０^−２〜０．２モルの範囲で使用することが好ましい。
本発明において、カブリ防止剤を感光材料に含有せしめる方法としては、前記還元剤の含有方法に記載の方法が挙げられ、有機ポリハロゲン化合物についても固体微粒子分散物で添加することが好ましい。
【０１５５】
（その他のカブリ防止剤）
その他のカブリ防止剤としては特開平１１−６５０２１号段落番号０１１３の水銀（ＩＩ）塩、同号段落番号０１１４の安息香酸類、特開２０００−２０６６４２号のサリチル酸誘導体、特開２０００−２２１６３４号の式（Ｓ）で表されるホルマリンスカベンジャー化合物、特開平１１−３５２６２４号の請求項９に係るトリアジン化合物、特開平６−１１７９１号の一般式（ＩＩＩ）で表される化合物、４−ヒドロキシ−６−メチル−１，３，３ａ，７−テトラザインデン等が挙げられる。
【０１５６】
本発明における熱現像感光材料はカブリ防止を目的としてアゾリウム塩を含有してもよい。アゾリウム塩としては、特開昭５９−１９３４４７号記載の一般式（ＸＩ）で表される化合物、特公昭５５−１２５８１号記載の化合物、特開昭６０−１５３０３９号記載の一般式（ＩＩ）で表される化合物が挙げられる。アゾリウム塩は感光材料のいかなる部位に添加してもよいが、添加層としては感光性層を有する面の層に添加することが好ましく、有機銀塩含有層に添加することがさらに好ましい。アゾリウム塩の添加時期としては塗布液調製のいかなる工程で行ってもよく、有機銀塩含有層に添加する場合は有機銀塩調製時から塗布液調製時のいかなる工程でもよいが有機銀塩調製後から塗布直前が好ましい。アゾリウム塩の添加法としては粉末、溶液、微粒子分散物などいかなる方法で行ってもよい。また、増感色素、還元剤、色調剤など他の添加物と混合した溶液として添加してもよい。本発明においてアゾリウム塩の添加量としてはいかなる量でもよいが、銀１モル当たり１×１０^−６モル以上２モル以下が好ましく、１×１０^−３モル以上０．５モル以下がさらに好ましい。
【０１５７】
本発明には現像を抑制あるいは促進させ現像を制御するため、分光増感効率を向上させるため、現像前後の保存性を向上させるためなどにメルカプト化合物、ジスルフィド化合物、チオン化合物を含有させることができ、特開平１０−６２８９９号の段落番号００６７〜００６９、特開平１０−１８６５７２号の一般式（Ｉ）で表される化合物及びその具体例として段落番号００３３〜００５２、欧州特許公開第０８０３７６４Ａ１号の第２０ページ第３６〜５６行に記載されている。その中でも特開平９−２９７３６７号、特開平９−３０４８７５号、特開２００１−１００３５８号、特願２００１−１０４２１３号、特願２００１−１０４２１４等に記載されているメルカプト置換複素芳香族化合物が好ましい。
【０１５８】
（色調剤）
本発明の熱現像感光材料では色調剤の添加が好ましく、色調剤については、特開平１０−６２８９９号の段落番号００５４〜００５５、欧州特許公開第０８０３７６４Ａ１号の第２１ページ第２３〜４８行、特開２０００−３５６３１７号や特願２０００−１８７２９８号に記載されており、特に、フタラジノン類（フタラジノン、フタラジノン誘導体もしくは金属塩；例えば４−（１−ナフチル）フタラジノン、６−クロロフタラジノン、５，７−ジメトキシフタラジノンおよび２，３−ジヒドロ−１，４−フタラジンジオン）；フタラジノン類とフタル酸類（例えば、フタル酸、４−メチルフタル酸、４−ニトロフタル酸、フタル酸二アンモニウム、フタル酸ナトリウム、フタル酸カリウムおよびテトラクロロ無水フタル酸）との組合せ；フタラジン類（フタラジン、フタラジン誘導体もしくは金属塩；例えば４−（１−ナフチル）フタラジン、６−イソプロピルフタラジン、６−ｔ−ブチルフラタジン、６−クロロフタラジン、５，７−ジメトキシフタラジンおよび２，３−ジヒドロフタラジン）；フタラジン類とフタル酸類との組合せが好ましく、特にフタラジン類とフタル酸類の組合せが好ましい。そのなかでも特に好ましい組み合わせは６−イソプロピルフタラジンとフタル酸または４メチルフタル酸との組み合わせである。
【０１５９】
（その他の添加剤）
本発明における感光性層に用いることのできる可塑剤および潤滑剤については特開平１１−６５０２１号段落番号０１１７、超硬調画像形成のための超硬調化剤やその添加方法や量については、同号段落番号０１１８、特開平１１−２２３８９８号段落番号０１３６〜０１９３、特開平２０００−２８４３９９号の式（Ｈ）、式（１）〜（３）、式（Ａ）、（Ｂ）の化合物、特願平１１−９１６５２号記載の一般式（ＩＩＩ）〜（Ｖ）の化合物（具体的化合物：化２１〜化２４）、硬調化促進剤については特開平１１−６５０２１号段落番号０１０２、特開平１１−２２３８９８号段落番号０１９４〜０１９５に記載されている。
【０１６０】
蟻酸や蟻酸塩を強いかぶらせ物質として用いるには、感光性ハロゲン化銀を含有する感光性層を有する側に銀１モル当たり５ミリモル以下、さらには１ミリモル以下で含有することが好ましい。
【０１６１】
本発明の熱現像感光材料で超硬調化剤を用いる場合には五酸化二リンが水和してできる酸またはその塩を併用して用いることが好ましい。五酸化二リンが水和してできる酸またはその塩としては、メタリン酸（塩）、ピロリン酸（塩）、オルトリン酸（塩）、三リン酸（塩）、四リン酸（塩）、ヘキサメタリン酸（塩）などを挙げることができる。特に好ましく用いられる五酸化二リンが水和してできる酸またはその塩としては、オルトリン酸（塩）、ヘキサメタリン酸（塩）を挙げることができる。具体的な塩としてはオルトリン酸ナトリウム、オルトリン酸二水素ナトリウム、ヘキサメタリン酸ナトリウム、ヘキサメタリン酸アンモニウムなどがある。
五酸化二リンが水和してできる酸またはその塩の使用量（感光材料１ｍ^２あたりの塗布量）は感度やカブリなどの性能に合わせて所望の量でよいが、０．１〜５００ｍｇ／ｍ^２が好ましく、０．５〜１００ｍｇ／ｍ^２がより好ましい。
【０１６２】
（層構成）
本発明における熱現像感光材料は感光性層の付着防止などの目的で表面保護層を設けることができる。表面保護層は単層でもよいし、複数層であってもよい。表面保護層については、特開平１１−６５０２１号公報段落番号［０１１９］〜［０１２０］、特願２０００−１７１９３６号明細書に記載されている。
本発明の表面保護層のバインダーとしてはゼラチンが好ましいがポリビニルアルコール（ＰＶＡ）を用いる若しくは併用することも好ましい。ゼラチンとしてはイナートゼラチン（例えば新田ゼラチン７５０）、フタル化ゼラチン（例えば新田ゼラチン８０１）など使用することができる。ＰＶＡとしては、特開２０００−１７１９３６号公報の段落番号［０００９］〜［００２０］に記載のものが挙げられ、完全けん化物のＰＶＡ−１０５、部分けん化物のＰＶＡ−２０５，ＰＶＡ−３３５、変性ポリビニルアルコールのＭＰ−２０３（以上、クラレ（株）製の商品名）などが好ましく挙げられる。保護層（１層当たり）のポリビニルアルコール塗布量（支持体１ｍ^２当たり）としては０．３〜４．０ｇ／ｍ^２が好ましく、０．３〜２．０ｇ／ｍ^２がより好ましい。
【０１６３】
特に寸法変化が問題となる印刷用途に本発明における熱現像感光材料を用いる場合には、表面保護層やバック層にポリマーラテックスを用いることが好ましい。このようなポリマーラテックスについては「合成樹脂エマルジョン（奥田平、稲垣寛編集、高分子刊行会発行（１９７８））」、「合成ラテックスの応用（杉村孝明、片岡靖男、鈴木聡一、笠原啓司編集、高分子刊行会発行（１９９３））」、「合成ラテックスの化学（室井宗一著、高分子刊行会発行（１９７０））」などにも記載され、具体的にはメチルメタクリレート（３３．５質量％）／エチルアクリレート（５０質量％）／メタクリル酸（１６．５質量％）コポリマーのラテックス、メチルメタクリレート（４７．５質量％）／ブタジエン（４７．５質量％）／イタコン酸（５質量％）コポリマーのラテックス、エチルアクリレート／メタクリル酸のコポリマーのラテックス、メチルメタクリレート（５８．９質量％）／２−エチルヘキシルアクリレート（２５．４質量％）／スチレン（８．６質量％）／２−ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート（５．１質量％）／アクリル酸（２．０質量％）コポリマーのラテックス、メチルメタクリレート（６４．０質量％）／スチレン（９．０質量％）／ブチルアクリレート（２０．０質量％）／２−ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート（５．０質量％）／アクリル酸（２．０質量％）コポリマーのラテックスなどが挙げられる。さらに、表面保護層用のバインダーとして、特願平１１−６８７２号明細書のポリマーラテックスの組み合わせ、特願平１１−１４３０５８号明細書の段落番号［００２１］〜［００２５］に記載の技術、特願平１１−６８７２号明細書の段落番号［００２７］〜［００２８］に記載の技術、特願平１０−１９９６２６号明細書の段落番号［００２３］〜［００４１］に記載の技術を適用してもよい。表面保護層のポリマーラテックスの比率は全バインダーの１０質量％以上９０質量％以下が好ましく、特に２０質量％以上８０質量％以下が好ましい。
表面保護層（１層当たり）の全バインダー（水溶性ポリマーおよびラテックスポリマーを含む）塗布量（支持体１ｍ^２当たり）としては０．３〜５．０ｇ／ｍ^２が好ましく、０．３〜２．０ｇ／ｍ^２がより好ましい。
【０１６４】
本発明における感光性層塗布液の調製温度は３０℃以上６５℃以下がよく、さらに好ましい温度は３５℃以上６０℃未満、より好ましい温度は３５℃以上５５℃以下である。また、ポリマーラテックス添加直後の感光性層塗布液の温度が３０℃以上６５℃以下で維持されることが好ましい。
【０１６５】
本発明における感光性層は、支持体上に一またはそれ以上の層で構成される。本発明における感光性層が一層で構成される場合は、該感光性層は有機銀塩、感光性ハロゲン化銀、還元剤およびバインダーよりなり、必要により色調剤、被覆助剤および他の補助剤などの所望による追加の材料を含む。
本発明における感光性層が二層以上で構成される場合は、第１感光性層（通常は支持体に隣接した層）中に有機銀塩、および感光性ハロゲン化銀を含み、第２感光性層または両層中にいくつかの他の成分を含まなければならない。また各感光性層がそれぞれ有機銀塩、感光性ハロゲン化銀、還元剤およびバインダーを含んでいてもよい。
【０１６６】
多色感光性熱現像写真材料の場合の構成は、各色についてこれらの二層の組合せを含んでよく、また米国特許第４，７０８，９２８号明細書に記載されているように単一層内に全ての成分を含んでいてもよい。多染料多色感光性熱現像写真材料の場合、各乳剤層は一般に米国特許第４，４６０，６８１号明細書に記載されているように、各感光性層の間に官能性もしくは非官能性のバリアー層を使用することにより、互いに区別されて保持される。
【０１６７】
本発明における感光性層には色調改良、レーザー露光時の干渉縞発生防止、イラジエーション防止の観点から各種染料や顔料（例えばＣ．Ｉ．ＰｉｇｍｅｎｔＢｌｕｅ　６０、Ｃ．Ｉ．Ｐｉｇｍｅｎｔ　Ｂｌｕｅ　６４、Ｃ．Ｉ．Ｐｉｇｍｅｎｔ　Ｂｌｕｅ　１５：６）を用いることができる。これらについては国際公開ＷＯ９８／３６３２２号公報、特開平１０−２６８４６５号公報、同１１−３３８０９８号公報等に詳細に記載されている。
【０１６８】
本発明における熱現像感光材料においては、アンチハレーション層を感光性層に対して光源から遠い側に設けることができる。
【０１６９】
本発明の熱現像感光材料は、感光性層に加えて非感光性層を有する。非感光性層は、その配置から（１）感光性層の上（支持体よりも遠い側）に設けられる保護層、（２）複数の感光性層の間や感光性層と保護層の間に設けられる中間層、（３）感光性層と支持体との間に設けられる下塗り層、（４）感光性層の反対側に設けられるバック層に分類できる。フィルター層は、（１）または（２）の層として感光材料に設けられる。アンチハレーション層は、（３）または（４）の層として熱現像感光材料に設けられる。
【０１７０】
アンチハレーション層については特開平１１−６５０２１号公報段落番号［０１２３］〜［０１２４］、特開平１１−２２３８９８号公報、同９−２３０５３１号公報、同１０−３６６９５号公報、同１０−１０４７７９号公報、同１１−２３１４５７号公報、同１１−３５２６２５号公報、同１１−３５２６２６号公報等に記載されている。
アンチハレーション層には、露光波長に吸収を有するアンチハレーション染料を含有する。露光波長が赤外域にある場合には赤外線吸収染料を用いればよく、その場合には可視域に吸収を有しない染料が好ましい。
可視域に吸収を有する染料を用いてハレーション防止を行う場合には、画像形成後には染料の色が実質的に残らないようにすることが好ましく、熱現像の熱により消色する手段を用いることが好ましく、特に非感光性層に熱消色染料と塩基プレカーサーとを添加してアンチハレーション層として機能させることが好ましい。これらの技術については特開平１１−２３１４５７号公報等に記載されている。
【０１７１】
上記熱消色染料の添加量は、染料の用途により決定する。一般には、目的とする波長で測定したときの光学濃度（吸光度）が０．１を越える量で使用する。光学濃度は、０．２〜２であることが好ましい。このような光学濃度を得るための染料の使用量は、一般に０．００１〜１ｇ／ｍ^２程度である。
【０１７２】
なお、このように染料を消色すると、熱現像後の光学濃度を０．１以下に低下させることができる。二種類以上の熱消色染料を、熱消色型記録材料や熱現像感光材料において併用してもよい。同様に、二種類以上の塩基プレカーサーを併用してもよい。
このような熱消色染料と塩基プレカーサーとを用いる熱消色においては、特開平１１−３５２６２６号公報に記載のような塩基プレカーサーと混合する場合、融点を３℃（ｄｅｇ）以上降下させる物質（例えば、ジフェニルスルフォン、４−クロロフェニル（フェニル）スルフォン）、２−ナフチルベンゾエート等を併用することが熱消色性等の点で好ましい。
【０１７３】
本発明における熱現像感光材料は、銀色調、画像の経時変化を改良する目的で３００〜４５０ｎｍに吸収極大を有する着色剤を添加することができる。このような着色剤は、特開昭６２−２１０４５８号公報、同６３−１０４０４６号公報、同６３−１０３２３５号公報、同６３−２０８８４６号公報、同６３−３０６４３６号公報、同６３−３１４５３５号公報、特開平０１−６１７４５号公報、特願平１１−２７６７５１号明細書などに記載されている。
このような着色剤は、通常、熱現像感光材料１ｍ^２当たりの塗布量で示した場合、０．１ｍｇ／ｍ^２〜１ｇ／ｍ^２の範囲で添加され、添加する層としては感光性層の反対側に設けられるバック層が好ましい。
【０１７４】
本発明の熱現像感光材料は、支持体の一方の側に少なくとも１層のハロゲン化銀乳剤を含む感光性層及び非感光性層を有し、他方の側にバック層を有する、いわゆる片面感光材料であることが好ましい。
【０１７５】
本発明の熱現像感光材料は、上記感光性ハロゲン化銀層および上記非感光性層の膜厚の合計が、５μｍ以上２０μｍ以下であることを特徴とし、７μｍ以上１６μｍ以下であることが好ましく、８μｍ以上１２μｍ以下であることがより好ましい。
上記膜厚の合計が５μｍ未満であると、必要な最高画像濃度を得ることが困難となる。
一方上記膜厚の合計が２０μｍを超えると、加工時の膜剥がれが生じやすくなり、加工スピードを早くすることができない。
【０１７６】
また、本発明の熱現像感光材料は、上記感光性ハロゲン化銀層の膜厚が、３μｍ以上１５μｍ以下であることが好ましく、４μｍ以上１３μｍ以下であることがより好ましい。上記感光性ハロゲン化銀層の膜厚が３μｍ未満であると、必要な最高画像濃度を得ることが困難となる場合がある。
一方、上記感光性ハロゲン化銀層の膜厚が１５μｍを越えると、加工時の膜剥がれが生じやすく、加工スピードを早くすることができない場合がある。
【０１７７】
本発明において、搬送性改良のためにマット剤を添加することが好ましく、マット剤については、特開平１１−６５０２１号公報段落番号［０１２６］〜［０１２７］に記載されている。マット剤は熱現像感光材料１ｍ^２当たりの塗布量で示した場合、好ましくは１〜４００ｍｇ／ｍ^２、より好ましくは５〜３００ｍｇ／ｍ^２である。
また、乳剤面のマット度は星屑故障が生じなければいかようでも良いが、ベック平滑度が３０秒以上２０００秒以下が好ましく、特に４０秒以上１５００秒以下が好ましい。ベック平滑度は、日本工業規格（ＪＩＳ）Ｐ８１１９「紙および板紙のベック試験器による平滑度試験方法」およびＴＡＰＰＩ標準法Ｔ４７９により容易に求めることができる。
【０１７８】
本発明においてバック層のマット度としてはベック平滑度が１２００秒以下１０秒以上が好ましく、８００秒以下２０秒以上が好ましく、さらに好ましくは５００秒以下４０秒以上である。
【０１７９】
本発明において、マット剤は熱現像感光材料の最外表面層もしくは最外表面層として機能する層、あるいは外表面に近い層に含有されるのが好ましく、またいわゆる保護層として作用する層に含有されることが好ましい。
【０１８０】
本発明に適用することのできるバック層については特開平１１−６５０２１号公報段落番号［０１２８］〜［０１３０］に記載されている。
【０１８１】
本発明における熱現像感光材料は、熱現像処理前の膜面ｐＨが７．０以下であることが好ましく、さらに好ましくは６．６以下である。その下限には特に制限はないが、３程度である。最も好ましいｐＨ範囲は４〜６．２の範囲である。膜面ｐＨの調節はフタル酸誘導体などの有機酸や硫酸などの不揮発性の酸、アンモニアなどの揮発性の塩基を用いることが、膜面ｐＨを低減させるという観点から好ましい。特にアンモニアは揮発しやすく、塗布する工程や熱現像される前に除去できることから低膜面ｐＨを達成する上で好ましい。
また、水酸化ナトリウムや水酸化カリウム、水酸化リチウム等の不揮発性の塩基とアンモニアとを併用することも好ましく用いられる。なお、膜面ｐＨの測定方法は、特願平１１−８７２９７号明細書の段落番号［０１２３］に記載されている。
【０１８２】
本発明において、感光性層、保護層、バック層など各層には硬膜剤を用いても良い。硬膜剤の例としてはＴ．Ｈ．Ｊａｍｅｓ著”ＴＨＥ　ＴＨＥＯＲＹ　ＯＦ　ＴＨＥ　ＰＨＯＴＯＧＲＡＰＨＩＣ　ＰＲＯＣＥＳＳ　ＦＯＵＲＴＨ　ＥＤＩＴＩＯＮ”（Ｍａｃｍｉｌｌａｎ　Ｐｕｂｌｉｓｈｉｎｇ　Ｃｏ．，Ｉｎｃ．刊、１９７７年刊）７７頁〜８７頁に記載の各方法があり、クロムみょうばん、２，４−ジクロロ−６−ヒドロキシ−ｓ−トリアジンナトリウム塩、Ｎ，Ｎ−エチレンビス（ビニルスルフォンアセトアミド）、Ｎ，Ｎ−プロピレンビス（ビニルスルフォンアセトアミド）の他、同書７８頁など記載の多価金属イオン、米国特許４，２８１，０６０号明細書、特開平６−２０８１９３号公報などのポリイソシアネート類、米国特許４，７９１，０４２号明細書などのエポキシ化合物類、特開昭６２−８９０４８号公報などのビニルスルホン系化合物類が好ましく用いられる。
【０１８３】
硬膜剤は溶液として添加され、この溶液の保護層塗布液中への添加時期は、塗布する１８０分前から直前、好ましくは６０分前から１０秒前であるが、混合方法および混合条件については本発明の効果が十分に現れる限りにおいては特に制限はない。具体的な混合方法としては添加流量とコーターへの送液量から計算した平均滞留時間を所望の時間となるようにしたタンクでの混合する方法やＮ．Ｈａｒｎｂｙ、Ｍ．Ｆ．Ｅｄｗａｒｄｓ、Ａ．Ｗ．Ｎｉｅｎｏｗ著、高橋幸司訳”液体混合技術”（日刊工業新聞社刊、１９８９年）の第８章等に記載されているスタチックミキサーなどを使用する方法がある。
【０１８４】
本発明に適用できる界面活性剤については特開平１１−６５０２１号公報段落番号［０１３２］、溶剤については同号公報段落番号［０１３３］、支持体については同号公報段落番号［０１３４］、帯電防止または導電層については同号公報段落番号［０１３５］、カラー画像を得る方法については同号公報段落番号［０１３６］に、滑り剤については特開平１１−８４５７３号公報段落番号［００６１］〜［００６４］や特願平１１−１０６８８１号明細書段落番号［００４９］〜［００６２］に記載されている。
【０１８５】
本発明においては金属酸化物を含む導電層を有することが好ましい。導電層の導電性材料は金属酸化物中に酸素欠陥、異種金属原子を導入して導電性を高めた金属酸化物が好ましく用いられる。
金属酸化物の例としてはＺｎＯ、ＴｉＯ_２、ＳｎＯ_２が好ましく、ＺｎＯに対してはＡｌ、Ｉｎの添加、ＳｎＯ_２に対してはＳｂ、Ｎｂ、Ｐ、ハロゲン元素等の添加、ＴｉＯ_２に対してはＮｂ、Ｔａ等の添加が好ましい。特にＳｂを添加したＳｎＯ_２が好ましい。
【０１８６】
異種原子の添加量は０．０１〜３０モル％の範囲が好ましく、０．１〜１０モル％の範囲がより好ましい。金属酸化物の形状は球状、針状、板状いずれでもよいが、導電性付与の効果の点で長軸／単軸比が２．０以上、好ましくは３．０〜５０の針状粒子がよい。
【０１８７】
金属酸化物の使用量は好ましくは１ｍｇ／ｍ^２〜１０００ｍｇ／ｍ^２の範囲で、より好ましくは１０ｍｇ／ｍ^２〜５００ｍｇ／ｍ^２の範囲、さらに好ましくは２０ｍｇ／ｍ^２〜２００ｍｇ／ｍ^２の範囲である。本発明における導電層は乳剤両側、バック両側のいずれに設置してもよいが、支持体とバック層との間に設置することが好ましい。本発明の導電層の具体例は特開平７−２９５１４６号、特開平１１−２２３９０１号に記載されている。
【０１８８】
本発明においてはフッ素系の界面活性剤を使用することが好ましい。フッ素系界面活性剤の具体例は特開平１０−１９７９８５号、特開２０００−１９６８０号、特開２０００−２１４５５４号等に記載された化合物があげられる。また、特開平９−２８１６８６号記載の高分子フッ素系界面活性剤も好ましく用いられる。
本発明においては、特願２０００−２０６５６０号、特願２００１−２０３４６２号、特願２００１−２４２３５７号、および特願２０００−２６４１１０号記載のフッ素系界面活性剤の使用が好ましい。特に、特願２００１−２４２３５７号、および特願２０００−２６４１１０号記載のフッ素系界面活性剤は、水系の塗布液で塗布・製造を行う場合、帯電調整能力、塗布面上の安定性、スベリ性の点で好ましく、特願２００１−２６４１１０号記載のフッ素系界面活性剤は、帯電調整能力が高く、使用量が少なくてすむという点で最も好ましい。
【０１８９】
本発明においてフッ素系界面活性剤は乳剤面、バック面のいずれにも使用することができ、両方の面に使用することが好ましい。また、前述の金属酸化物を含む導電層と組み合わせて使用することが特に好ましい。この場合には導電層を有する面のフッ素系界面活性剤の使用量を低減もしくは除去しても十分な性能が得られる。
【０１９０】
フッ素系界面活性剤の好ましい使用量は、乳剤面、バック面それぞれに０．１ｍｇ／ｍ^２〜１００ｍｇ／ｍ^２の範囲で、より好ましくは０．３ｍｇ／ｍ^２〜３０ｍｇ／ｍ^２の範囲、さらに好ましくは１ｍｇ／ｍ^２〜１０ｍｇ／ｍ^２の範囲である。特に特願２００１−２６４１１０号記載のフッ素系界面活性剤は効果が大きく、０．０１〜１０ｍｇ／ｍ^２の範囲が好ましく、０．１〜５ｍｇ／ｍ^２の範囲がより好ましい。
【０１９１】
本発明の熱現像感光材料に用いることができる支持体としては、透明支持体が好ましい。透明支持体は二軸延伸時にフィルム中に残存する内部歪みを緩和させ、熱現像処理中に発生する熱収縮歪みをなくすために、１３０〜１８５℃の温度範囲で熱処理を施したポリエステル、特にポリエチレンテレフタレートが好ましく用いられる。医療用の熱現像感光材料の場合、透明支持体は青色染料（例えば、特開平８−２４０８７７号公報実施例記載の染料−１）で着色されていてもよいし、無着色でもよい。支持体には、特開平１１−８４５７４号公報の水溶性ポリエステル、同１０−１８６５６５号公報のスチレンブタジエン共重合体、特開２０００−３９６８４号公報や特願平１１−１０６８８１号明細書段落番号［００６３］〜［００８０］の塩化ビニリデン共重合体などの下塗り技術を適用することが好ましい。また、帯電防止層若しくは下塗りについて特開昭５６−１４３４３０号公報、同５６−１４３４３１号公報、同５８−６２６４６号公報、同５６−１２０５１９号公報、特開平１１−８４５７３号公報の段落番号［００４０］〜［００５１］、米国特許第５，５７５，９５７号明細書、特開平１１−２２３８９８号公報の段落番号［００７８］〜［００８４］に記載の技術を適用することができる。
【０１９２】
本発明の熱現像感光材料は、モノシート型（受像材料のような他のシートを使用せずに、熱現像感光材料上に画像を形成できる型）であることが好ましい。
【０１９３】
本発明の熱現像感光材料には、さらに、酸化防止剤、安定化剤、可塑剤、紫外線吸収剤あるいは被覆助剤を添加してもよい。各種の添加剤は、感光性層あるいは非感光性層のいずれかに添加する。それらについて国際公開ＷＯ９８／３６３２２号公報、欧州特許公開ＥＰ８０３７６４Ａ１号公報、特開平１０−１８６５６７号公報、同１０−１８５６８号公報等を参考にすることができる。
【０１９４】
本発明における熱現像感光材料はいかなる方法で塗布されても良い。具体的には、エクストルージョンコーティング、スライドコーティング、カーテンコーティング、浸漬コーティング、ナイフコーティング、フローコーティング、または米国特許第２，６８１，２９４号明細書に記載の種類のホッパーを用いる押出コーティングを含む種々のコーティング操作が用いられ、Ｓｔｅｐｈｅｎ　Ｆ．Ｋｉｓｔｌｅｒ、Ｐｅｔｅｒｔ　Ｍ．Ｓｃｈｗｅｉｚｅｒ著”ＬＩＱＵＩＤ　ＦＩＬＭ　ＣＯＡＴＩＮＧ”（ＣＨＡＰＭＡＮ　＆　ＨＡＬＬ社刊、１９９７年）３９９頁〜５３６頁に記載のエクストルージョンコーティング、またはスライドコーティング好ましく用いられ、特に好ましくはスライドコーティングが用いられる。スライドコーティングに使用されるスライドコーターの形状の例は同書４２７頁のＦｉｇｕｒｅ　１１ｂ．１にある。また、所望により同書３９９頁〜５３６頁記載の方法、米国特許第２，７６１，７９１号明細書および英国特許第８３７，０９５号明細書に記載の方法により２層またはそれ以上の層を同時に被覆することができる。
【０１９５】
本発明における有機銀塩含有層塗布液は、いわゆるチキソトロピー流体であることが好ましい。この技術については特開平１１−５２５０９号公報を参考にすることができる。本発明における有機銀塩含有層塗布液は剪断速度０．１Ｓ^−１における粘度は４００ｍＰａ・ｓ以上１００，０００ｍＰａ・ｓ以下が好ましく、さらに好ましくは５００ｍＰａ・ｓ以上２０，０００ｍＰａ・ｓ以下である。また、剪断速度１０００Ｓ^−１においては１ｍＰａ・ｓ以上２００ｍＰａ・ｓ以下が好ましく、さらに好ましくは５ｍＰａ・ｓ以上８０ｍＰａ・ｓ以下である。
【０１９６】
本発明における熱現像感光材料に用いることのできる技術としては、欧州特許公開ＥＰ８０３７６４Ａ１号公報、欧州特許公開ＥＰ８８３０２２Ａ１号公報、国際公開ＷＯ９８／３６３２２号公報、特開昭５６−６２６４８号公報、同５８−６２６４４号公報、特開平９−４３７６号公報、同９−２８１６３７号公報、同９−２９７３６７号公報、同９−３０４８６９号公報、同９−３１１４０５号公報、同９−３２９８６５号公報、同１０−１０６６９号公報、同１０−６２８９９号公報、同１０−６９０２３号公報、同１０−１８６５６８号公報、同１０−９０８２３号公報、同１０−１７１０６３号公報、同１０−１８６５６５号公報、同１０−１８６５６７号公報、同１０−１８６５６９号公報〜同１０−１８６５７２号公報、同１０−１９７９７４号公報、同１０−１９７９８２号公報、同１０−１９７９８３号公報、同１０−１９７９８５号公報〜同１０−１９７９８７号公報、同１０−２０７００１号公報、同１０−２０７００４号公報、同１０−２２１８０７号公報、同１０−２８２６０１号公報、同１０−２８８８２３号公報、同１０−２８８８２４号公報、同１０−３０７３６５号公報、同１０−３１２０３８号公報、同１０−３３９９３４号公報、同１１−７１００号公報、同１１−１５１０５号公報、同１１−２４２００号公報、同１１−２４２０１号公報、同１１−３０８３２号公報、同１１−８４５７４号公報、同１１−６５０２１号公報、同１１−１０９５４７号公報、同１１−１２５８８０号公報、同１１−１２９６２９号公報、同１１−１３３５３６号公報〜同１１−１３３５３９号公報、同１１−１３３５４２号公報、同１１−１３３５４３号公報、同１１−２２３８９８号公報、同１１−３５２６２７号公報、同１１−３０５３７７号公報、同１１−３０５３７８号公報、同１１−３０５３８４号公報、同１１−３０５３８０号公報、同１１−３１６４３５号公報、同１１−３２７０７６号公報、同１１−３３８０９６号公報、同１１−３３８０９８号公報、同１１−３３８０９９号公報、同１１−３４３４２０号公報、特願２０００−１８７２９８号明細書、同２０００−１０２２９号明細書、同２０００−４７３４５号明細書、同２０００−２０６６４２号明細書、同２０００−９８５３０号明細書、同２０００−９８５３１号明細書、同２０００−１１２０５９号明細書、同２０００−１１２０６０号明細書、同２０００−１１２１０４号明細書、同２０００−１１２０６４号明細書、同２０００−１７１９３６号明細書も挙げられる。
【０１９７】
（包装材料）
本発明の感光材料は生保存時の写真性能の変動を押さえるため、もしくはカール、巻癖などを改良するために、酸素透過率および／または水分透過率の低い包装材料で包装することが好ましい。酸素透過率は２５℃で５０ｍｌ／ａｔｍ・ｍ２・ｄａｙ以下であることが好ましく、より好ましくは１０ｍｌ／ａｔｍ・ｍ２・ｄａｙ以下、さらに好ましくは１．０ｍｌ／ａｔｍ・ｍ２・ｄａｙ以下である。水分透過率は１０ｇ／ａｔｍ・ｍ２・ｄａｙ以下であることが好ましく、より好ましくは５ｇ／ａｔｍ・ｍ２・ｄａｙ以下、さらに好ましくは１ｇ／ａｔｍ・ｍ２・ｄａｙ以下である。
該酸素透過率および／または水分透過率の低い包装材料の具体例としては、たとえば特開平８−２５４７９３号。特開２０００−２０６６５３号明細書に記載されている包装材料である。
【０１９８】
（熱現像）
本発明の熱現像感光材料はいかなる方法で現像されてもよいが、通常イメージワイズに露光した熱現像感光材料を昇温して現像される。好ましい現像温度としては８０〜２５０℃であり、好ましくは１００〜１４０℃、さらに好ましくは１１０〜１３０℃である。現像時間としては１〜６０秒が好ましく、より好ましくは３〜３０秒、さらに好ましくは５〜２５秒、７〜１５秒が特に好ましい。
尚、本発明における熱現像（工程）は、現像温度として８０℃以上１５０℃以下、現像時間として５秒以上２０秒以下で加熱処理することが好ましく、現像温度として１００℃以上１３５℃以下、現像時間として７秒以上１５秒以下加熱処理することがより好ましい。
【０１９９】
熱現像の方式としてはドラム型ヒーター、プレート型ヒーターのいずれを使用してもよいが、プレートヒーター方式がより好ましい。プレートヒーター方式による熱現像方式とは特開平１１−１３３５７２号に記載の方法が好ましく、潜像を形成した熱現像感光材料を熱現像部にて加熱手段に接触させることにより可視像を得る熱現像装置であって、前記加熱手段がプレートヒータからなり、かつ前記プレートヒータの一方の面に沿って複数個の押えローラが対向配設され、前記押えローラと前記プレートヒータとの間に前記熱現像感光材料を通過させて熱現像を行うことを特徴とする熱現像装置である。プレートヒータを２〜６段に分けて先端部については１〜１０℃程度温度を下げることが好ましい。例えば、独立に温度制御できる４組のプレートヒータを使用し、それぞれ１１２℃、１１９℃、１２１℃、１２０℃になるように制御する例が挙げられる。このような方法は特開昭５４−３００３２号にも記載されており、熱現像感光材料に含有している水分や有機溶媒を系外に除外させることができ、また、急激に熱現像感光材料が加熱されることでの熱現像感光材料の支持体形状の変化を抑えることもできる。
【０２００】
本発明の感光材料はいかなる方法で露光されてもよいが、露光光源としてレーザー光が好ましい。本発明によるレーザー光としては、ガスレーザー（Ａｒ^＋、Ｈｅ−Ｎｅ）、ＹＡＧレーザー、色素レーザー、半導体レーザーなどが好ましい。また、半導体レーザーと第２高調波発生素子などを用いることもできる。好ましくは赤〜赤外発光のガス若しくは半導体レーザーである。
【０２０１】
露光部及び熱現像部を備えた医療用のレーザーイメージャーとしては富士メディカルドライレーザーイメージャーＦＭ−ＤＰ　Ｌを挙げることができる。ＦＭ−ＤＰ　Ｌに関しては、Ｆｕｊｉ　Ｍｅｄｉｃａｌ　Ｒｅｖｉｅｗ　Ｎｏ．８，ｐａｇｅ　３９〜５５に記載されており、それらの技術は本発明の熱現像感光材料のレーザーイメージャーとして適用することは言うまでもない。また、ＤＩＣＯＭ規格に適応したネットワークシステムとして富士メディカルシステムが提案した「ＡＤ　ｎｅｔｗｏｒｋ」の中でのレーザーイメージャー用の熱現像感光材料としても適用することができる。
【０２０２】
本発明の熱現像感光材料は、銀画像による黒白画像を形成し、医療診断用の熱現像感光材料、工業写真用熱現像感光材料、印刷用熱現像感光材料、ＣＯＭ用の熱現像感光材料として使用されることが好ましい。
【０２０３】
【実施例】
以下、本発明を実施例によって具体的に説明するが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。
＜実施例１＞
（ＰＥＴ支持体の作製）
テレフタル酸とエチレングリコ−ルを用い、常法に従い固有粘度ＩＶ＝０．６６（フェノ−ル／テトラクロルエタン＝６／４（重量比）中２５℃で測定）のＰＥＴを得た。これをペレット化した後１３０℃で４時間乾燥し、３００℃で溶融し下記構造の染料ＢＢを０．０４ｗｔ％含有させた。その後Ｔ型ダイから押し出して急冷し、熱固定後の膜厚が１７５μｍになるような厚みの未延伸フィルムを作製した。
【０２０４】
【化３２】

【０２０５】
これを、周速の異なるロ−ルを用い３．３倍に縦延伸、ついでテンタ−で４．５倍に横延伸を実施した。この時の温度はそれぞれ、１１０℃、１３０℃であった。この後、２４０℃で２０秒間熱固定後これと同じ温度で横方向に４％緩和した。この後テンタ−のチャック部をスリットした後、両端にナ−ル加工を行い、４ｋｇ／ｃｍ^２で巻き取り、厚み１７５μｍのロ−ルを得た。
【０２０６】
（表面コロナ処理）
ピラー社製ソリッドステートコロナ処理機６ＫＶＡモデルを用い、支持体の両面を室温下において２０ｍ／分で処理した。この時の電流、電圧の読み取り値から、支持体には０．３７５ｋＶ・Ａ・分／ｍ^２の処理がなされていることがわかった。この時の処理周波数は９．６ｋＨｚ、電極と誘電体ロ−ルのギャップクリアランスは１．６ｍｍであった。
【０２０７】

【０２０８】

【０２０９】

【０２１０】
上記厚さ１７５μｍの２軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレート支持体の両面それぞれに、上記コロナ放電処理を施した後、片面（感光性層面）に上記下塗り塗布液処方▲１▼をワイヤーバーでウエット塗布量が６．６ｍｌ／ｍ^２（片面当たり）になるように塗布して１８０℃で５分間乾燥し、ついでこの裏面（バック面）に上記下塗り塗布液処方▲２▼をワイヤーバーでウエット塗布量が５．７ｍｌ／ｍ^２になるように塗布して１８０℃で５分間乾燥し、更に裏面（バック面）に上記下塗り塗布液処方▲３▼をワイヤーバーでウエット塗布量が７．７ｍｌ／ｍ^２になるように塗布して１８０℃で６分間乾燥して下塗り支持体を作製した。
【０２１１】
（バック面塗布液の調製）
（塩基プレカーサーの固体微粒子分散液（ａ）の調製）
塩基プレカーサー化合物−１を、１．５ｋｇ、および界面活性剤（商品名：デモールＮ、花王（株）製）２２５ｇ、ジフェニルスルホン９３７．５ｇ、パラヒドロキシ安息香酸ブチルエステル（商品名：メッキンス、上野製薬製）１５ｇ、及び蒸留水を加えて総量を５．０ｋｇに合わせて混合し、混合液を横型サンドミル（ＵＶＭ−２：アイメックス（株）製）を用いてビーズ分散した。分散方法は、混合液をを平均直径０．５ｍｍのジルコニアビーズを充填したＵＶＭ−２にダイアフラムポンプで送液し、内圧５０ｈＰａ以上の状態で、所望の平均粒径が得られるまで分散した。
分散物は、分光吸収測定を行って該分散物の４５０ｎｍにおける吸光度と６５０ｎｍにおける吸光度の比（Ｄ４５０／Ｄ６５０）が２．２以上であるところまで分散した。得られた分散物は上記塩基プレカーサ化合物ー１の濃度で２０質量％となるように蒸留水で希釈し、ごみ取りのためにろ過（平均細孔径：３μｍのポリプロピレン製フィルター）を行って実用に供した。
【０２１２】
（染料固体微粒子分散液の調製）
シアニン染料化合物−１を６．０ｋｇおよびｐ−ドデシルベンゼンスルホン酸ナトリウム３．０ｋｇ、花王（株）製界面活性剤デモールＳＮＢ　０．６ｋｇ、および消泡剤（商品名：サーフィノール１０４Ｅ、日信化学（株）製）０．１５ｋｇを蒸留水と混合して、総液量を６０ｋｇとした。混合液を横型サンドミル（ＵＶＭ−２：アイメックス（株）製）を用いて、０．５ｍｍのジルコニアビーズで分散した。
分散物は、分光吸収測定を行って該分散物の分光吸収における６５０ｎｍにおける吸光度と７５０ｎｍにおける吸光度の比（Ｄ６５０／Ｄ７５０）が５．０以上であるところまで分散した。得られた分散物は、シアニン染料の濃度で６質量％となるように蒸留水で希釈し、ごみ取りのためにフィルターろ過（平均細孔径：１μｍ）を行って実用に供した。
【０２１３】
（ハレーション防止層塗布液の調製）
ゼラチン；３０ｇ、ポリアクリルアミド２４．５ｇ、１ｍｏｌ／ｌの苛性２．２ｇ、単分散ポリメチルメタクリレート微粒子（平均粒子サイズ８μｍ、粒径標準偏差０．４）２．４ｇ、ベンゾイソチアゾリノン０．０８ｇ、上記染料固体微粒子分散液３５．９ｇ、上記塩基プレカーサーの固体微粒子分散液（ａ）を７４．２ｇ、ポリエチレンスルホン酸ナトリウム０．６ｇ、青色染料化合物−１を０．２１ｇ、黄色染料化合物−１を０．１５ｇ、アクリル酸／エチルアクリレート共重合ラテックス（共重合比５／９５）８．３ｇを混合し、水にて全体を８１８ｍｌとし、ハレーション防止層塗布液を調製した。
【０２１４】
（バック面保護層塗布液の調製）
容器を４０℃に保温し、ゼラチン；４０ｇ、流動パラフィン乳化物を流動パラフィンとして１．５ｇ、ベンゾイソチアゾリノン３５ｍｇ、１ｍｏｌ／ｌの苛性６．８ｇ、ｔ−オクチルフェノキシエトキシエタンスルホン酸ナトリウム０．５ｇ、ポリスチレンスルホン酸ナトリウム０．２７ｇ、フッ素系界面活性剤（Ｆ−１）２％水溶液５．４ｍｌ、フッ素系界面活性剤（Ｆ−２）２％水溶液５．４ｍｌ、エチルアクリレート共重合体（共重合質量比５／９５）６．０ｇ、Ｎ，Ｎ−エチレンビス（ビニルスルホンアセトアミド）２．０ｇを混合し、水にて全体を１０００ｍｌとしてバック面保護層塗布液とした。
【０２１５】
（ハロゲン化銀乳剤の調製）
《ハロゲン化銀乳剤１の調製》
蒸留水１４２１ｍｌに１質量％臭化カリウム溶液３．１ｍｌを加え、さらに０．５ｍｏｌ／Ｌ濃度の硫酸を３．５ｍｌ、フタル化ゼラチン３１．７ｇを添加した液をステンレス製反応壺中で攪拌しながら、３０℃に液温を保ち、硝酸銀２２．２２ｇに蒸留水を加え９５．４ｍｌに希釈した溶液Ａと臭化カリウム１５．３ｇとヨウ化カリウム０．８ｇを蒸留水にて容量９７．４ｍｌに希釈した溶液Ｂを一定流量で４５秒間かけて全量添加した。その後、３．５質量％の過酸化水素水溶液を１０ｍｌ添加し、さらにベンゾイミダゾールの１０質量％水溶液を１０．８ｍｌ添加した。さらに、硝酸銀５１．８６ｇに蒸留水を加えて３１７．５ｍｌに希釈した溶液Ｃと臭化カリウム４４．２ｇとヨウ化カリウム２．２ｇを蒸留水にて容量４００ｍｌに希釈した溶液Ｄを、溶液Ｃは一定流量で２０分間かけて全量添加し、溶液ＤはｐＡｇを８．１に維持しながらコントロールドダブルジェット法で添加した。銀１モル当たり１×１０^−４モルになるよう六塩化イリジウム（ＩＩＩ）酸カリウム塩を溶液Ｃおよび溶液Ｄを添加しはじめてから１０分後に全量添加した。また、溶液Ｃの添加終了の５秒後に六シアン化鉄（ＩＩ）カリウム水溶液を銀１モル当たり３×１０^−４モル全量添加した。０．５ｍｏｌ／Ｌ濃度の硫酸を用いてｐＨを３．８に調整し、攪拌を止め、沈降／脱塩／水洗工程をおこなった。１ｍｏｌ／Ｌ濃度の水酸化ナトリウムを用いてｐＨ５．９に調整し、ｐＡｇ８．０のハロゲン化銀分散物を作製した。
【０２１６】
上記ハロゲン化銀分散物を攪拌しながら３８℃に維持して、０．３４質量％の１，２−ベンゾイソチアゾリン−３−オンのメタノール溶液を５ｍｌ加え、４０分後に４７℃に昇温した。昇温の２０分後にベンゼンチオスルホン酸ナトリウムをメタノール溶液で銀１モルに対して７．６×１０^−５モル加え、更に５分後にテルル増感剤Ｃメタノール溶液で銀１モル当り２．９×１０^−４モル加えて９１分間熟成した。その後、分光増感色素Ａと増感色素Ｂのモル比で３：１のメタノール溶液を銀１モル当たり増感色素ＡとＢの合計として１．２×１０^−３モル加え、１分後にＮ，Ｎ’−ジヒドロキシ−Ｎ”−ジエチルメラミンの０．８質量％メタノール溶液１．３ｍｌを加え、更に４分後に、５−メチル−２−メルカプトベンゾイミダゾールをメタノール溶液で銀１モル当たり４．８×１０^−３モル、１−フェニル−２−ヘプチル−５−メルカプト−１，３，４−トリアゾールをメタノール溶液で銀１モルに対して５．４×１０^−３モル、及び１−（３−メチルウレイド）−５−メルカブトテトラゾールナトリウム塩を水溶液で銀１モルに対して８．５×１０^−３モル添加して、ハロゲン化銀乳剤１を作製した。
【０２１７】
調製できたハロゲン化銀乳剤中の粒子は、平均球相当径０．０４２μｍ、球相当径の変動係数２０％のヨウドを均一に３．５モル％含むヨウ臭化銀粒子であった。粒子サイズ等は、電子顕微鏡を用い１０００個の粒子の平均から求めた。この粒子の｛１００｝面比率は、クベルカムンク法を用いて８０％と求められた。
【０２１８】
《ハロゲン化銀乳剤２の調製》
ハロゲン化銀乳剤１の調製において、粒子形成時の液温３０℃を４７℃に変更し、溶液Ｂは臭化カリウム１５．９ｇを蒸留水にて容量９７．４ｍｌに希釈することに変更し、溶液Ｄは臭化カリウム４５．８ｇを蒸留水にて容量４００ｍｌに希釈することに変更し、溶液Ｃの添加時間を３０分にして、六シアノ鉄（ＩＩ）カリウムを除去した以外は同様にして、ハロゲン化銀乳剤２の調製を行った。ハロゲン化銀乳剤１と同様に沈殿／脱塩／水洗／分散を行った。更にテルル増感剤Ｃの添加量を銀１モル当り１．１×１０^−４モル、分光増感色素Ａと分光増感色素Ｂのモル比で３：１のメタノール溶液の添加量を銀１モル当たり増感色素Ａと増感色素Ｂの合計として７．０×１０^−４モル、１−フェニル−２−ヘプチル−５−メルカプト−１，３，４−トリアゾールを銀１モルに対して３．３×１０^−３モル、および、１−（３−メチルウレイド）−５−メルカブトテトラゾールナトリウム塩を銀１モルに対して４．７×１０^−３モル添加に変えた以外はハロゲン化銀乳剤１と同様にして分光増感、化学増感及び５−メチル−２−メルカプトベンゾイミダゾール、１−フェニル−２−ヘプチル−５−メルカプト−１，３，４−トリアゾールの添加を行い、ハロゲン化銀乳剤２を得た。ハロゲン化銀乳剤２の乳剤粒子は、平均球相当径０．０８０μｍ、球相当径の変動係数２０％の純臭化銀立方体粒子であった。
【０２１９】
《ハロゲン化銀乳剤３の調製》
ハロゲン化銀乳剤１の調製において、粒子形成時の液温３０℃を２７℃に変更する以外は同様にして、ハロゲン化銀乳剤３の調製を行った。また、ハロゲン化銀乳剤１と同様に沈殿／脱塩／水洗／分散を行った。分光増感色素Ａと分光増感色素Ｂのモル比で１：１を固体分散物（ゼラチン水溶液）として添加量を銀１モル当たり増感色素Ａと増感色素Ｂの合計として６×１０^−３モル、テルル増感剤Ｃの添加量を銀１モル当たり５．２×１０^−４モルに変え、テルル増感剤の添加３分後に臭化金酸を銀１モル当たり５×１０^−４モルとチオシアン酸カリウムを銀１モルあたり２×１０^−３モルを添加したこと以外は乳剤１と同様にして、ハロゲン化銀乳剤３を得た。ハロゲン化銀乳剤３の乳剤粒子は、平均球相当径０．０３４μｍ、球相当径の変動係数２０％のヨウドを均一に３．５モル％含むヨウ臭化銀粒子であった。
【０２２０】
《塗布液用混合乳剤Ａの調製》
ハロゲン化銀乳剤１を７０質量％、ハロゲン化銀乳剤２を１５質量％、ハロゲン化銀乳剤３を１５質量％溶解し、ベンゾチアゾリウムヨーダイドを１質量％水溶液にて銀１モル当たり７×１０^−３モル添加した。さらに塗布液用混合乳剤Ａを１ｋｇあたりハロゲン化銀の含有量が銀として３８．２ｇとなるように加水し、塗布液用混合乳剤Ａを１ｋｇあたり０．３４ｇとなるように１−（３−メチルウレイド）−５−メルカブトテトラゾールナトリウム塩を添加した。
【０２２１】
《還元可能な銀塩分散物の調製》
▲１▼：　還元可能な銀塩分散物Ａの調製
ＣＯＧＮＩＳ　ＤＥＵＴＳＣＨＬＡＮＤ　ＧｍｂＨ製ベヘン酸（製品名ＥＤＥＮＯＲ　Ｃ２２−８５ＪＰ　ＧＷ）８７．６ｋｇ、蒸留水４２３Ｌ、５ｍｏｌ／Ｌ濃度のＮａＯＨ水溶液４９．２Ｌ、ｔｅｒｔ−ブタノール１２０Ｌを混合し、７５℃にて１時間攪拌し反応させ、ベヘン酸ナトリウム溶液を得た。別に、硝酸銀４０．４ｋｇの水溶液２０６．２Ｌ（ｐＨ４．０）を用意し、１０℃にて保温した。６３５Ｌの蒸留水と３０Ｌのｔｅｒｔ−ブタノールを入れた反応容器を３０℃に保温し、十分に撹拌しながら先のベヘン酸ナトリウム溶液の全量と硝酸銀水溶液の全量を流量一定でそれぞれ９３分１５秒と９０分かけて添加した。
このとき、硝酸銀水溶液添加開始後１１分間は硝酸銀水溶液のみが添加されるようにし、そのあとベヘン酸ナトリウム溶液を添加開始し、硝酸銀水溶液の添加終了後１４分１５秒間はベヘン酸ナトリウム溶液のみが添加されるようにした。このとき、反応容器内の温度は３０℃とし、液温度が一定になるように外温コントロールした。また、ベヘン酸ナトリウム溶液の添加系の配管は、２重管の外側に温水を循環させる事により保温し、添加ノズル先端の出口の液温度が７５℃になるよう調製した。また、硝酸銀水溶液の添加系の配管は、２重管の外側に冷水を循環させることにより保温した。ベヘン酸ナトリウム溶液の添加位置と硝酸銀水溶液の添加位置は撹拌軸を中心として対称的な配置とし、また反応液に接触しないような高さに調製した。
【０２２２】
ベヘン酸ナトリウム溶液を添加終了後、そのままの温度で２０分間撹拌放置し、３０分かけて３５℃に昇温し、その後２１０分熟成を行った。熟成終了後直ちに、遠心濾過で固形分を濾別し、固形分を濾過水の伝導度が３０μＳ／ｃｍになるまで水洗した。
その際、電導度低下を促す為に、ウエットケーキに純水を加えスラリー状にする操作を３回実施した。得られた脂肪酸銀のウエットケーキを遠心力Ｇが７００の状態で１時間振り切った。尚Ｇは、１．１１９×１０^−５×容器の半径（ｃｍ）×回転数（ｒｐｍ）^２であらわされる。
この様にして得られた脂肪酸銀ウエットケーキの固形分含量（ウエットケーキ１ｇを１１０℃で２ｈ乾燥して測定する）は４４％であった。
【０２２３】
得られたベヘン酸銀粒子の形態を電子顕微鏡撮影により評価したところ、平均値でａ＝０．１４μｍ、ｂ＝０．４μｍ、ｃ＝０．６μｍ、平均アスペクト比５．２、平均球相当径０．５２μｍ、球相当径の変動係数１５％のりん片状の結晶であった。（ａ，ｂ，ｃは本文の規定）
【０２２４】
乾燥固形分２６０ｋｇ相当のウエットケーキに対し、ポリビニルアルコール（商品名：ＰＶＡ−２１７）１９．３ｋｇおよび水を添加し、全体量を１０００ｋｇとしてからディゾルバー羽根でスラリー化し、更にパイプラインミキサー（みづほ工業製：ＰＭ−１０型）で予備分散した。
【０２２５】
次に予備分散済みの原液を分散機（商品名：マイクロフルイダイザーＭ−６１０、マイクロフルイデックス・インターナショナル・コーポレーション製、Ｚ型インタラクションチャンバー使用）の圧力を１２６０ｋｇ／ｃｍ^２に調節して、三回処理し、ベヘン酸銀分散物を得た。冷却操作は蛇管式熱交換器をインタラクションチャンバーの前後に各々装着し、冷媒の温度を調節することで１８℃の分散温度に設定した。
このようにして、下記構造式で表されるベヘン酸銀Ｃ−１の分散物である還元可能な銀塩分散物Ａを得た。
Ｃ−１
ＣＨ_３（ＣＨ_２）_２０ＣＯＯＡｇ
【０２２６】
▲２▼：還元可能な銀塩分散物Ｂ〜Ｙの調製
還元可能な銀塩分散物Ａの調製と同様に、ＣＯＧＮＩＳ　ＤＥＵＴＳＣＨＬＡＮＤ　ＧｍｂＨ製ベヘン酸（製品名ＥＤＥＮＯＲ　Ｃ２２−８５ＪＰ　ＧＷ）に対してカルボキシル基として等モル量の化合物（表１に記載）、蒸留水４２３Ｌ、５ｍｏｌ／Ｌ濃度のＮａＯＨ水溶液４９．２Ｌ、ｔｅｒｔ−ブタノール１２０Ｌを混合し、７５℃にて１時間攪拌し反応させ、ナトリウム塩溶液を得た。別に、硝酸銀４０．４ｋｇの水溶液２０６．２Ｌ（ｐＨ４．０）を用意し、１０℃にて保温した。６３５Ｌの蒸留水と３０Ｌのｔｅｒｔ−ブタノールを入れた反応容器を３０℃に保温し、十分に撹拌しながら先のナトリウム塩溶液の全量と硝酸銀水溶液の全量を流量一定でそれぞれ９３分１５秒と９０分かけて添加した。このとき、硝酸銀水溶液添加開始後１１分間は硝酸銀水溶液のみが添加されるようにし、そのあとナトリウム塩溶液を添加開始し、硝酸銀水溶液の添加終了後１４分１５秒間はナトリウム塩溶液のみが添加されるようにした。このとき、反応容器内の温度は３０℃とし、液温度が一定になるように外温コントロールした。
また、ナトリウム塩溶液の添加系の配管は、２重管の外側に温水を循環させる事により保温し、添加ノズル先端の出口の液温度が７５℃になるよう調製した。また、硝酸銀水溶液の添加系の配管は、２重管の外側に冷水を循環させることにより保温した。ナトリウム塩溶液の添加位置と硝酸銀水溶液の添加位置は撹拌軸を中心として対称的な配置とし、また反応液に接触しないような高さに調製した。
【０２２７】
ナトリウム塩溶液を添加終了後、そのままの温度で２０分間撹拌放置し、３０分かけて３５℃に昇温し、その後２１０分熟成を行った。熟成終了後直ちに、遠心濾過で固形分を濾別し、固形分を濾過水の伝導度が３０μＳ／ｃｍになるまで水洗した。
その際、電導度低下を促す為に、ウエットケーキに純水を加えスラリー状にする操作を３回実施した。得られた脂肪酸銀のウエットケーキを遠心力Ｇが７００の状態で１時間振り切った。尚Ｇは、１．１１９×１０^−５×容器の半径（ｃｍ）×回転数（ｒｐｍ）^２であらわされる。
【０２２８】
銀塩分散物Ａと同じ銀含有率になるために必要な量のウエットケーキに対し、ポリビニルアルコール（商品名：ＰＶＡ−２１７）１９．３ｋｇおよび水を添加し、全体量を１０００ｋｇとしてからディゾルバー羽根でスラリー化し、更にパイプラインミキサー（みづほ工業製：ＰＭ−１０型）で予備分散した。
【０２２９】
次に予備分散済みの原液を分散機（商品名：マイクロフルイダイザーＭ−６１０、マイクロフルイデックス・インターナショナル・コーポレーション製、Ｚ型インタラクションチャンバー使用）の圧力を１２６０ｋｇ／ｃｍ^２に調節して、三回処理し、ベヘン酸銀分散物を得た。冷却操作は蛇管式熱交換器をインタラクションチャンバーの前後に各々装着し、冷媒の温度を調節することで１８℃の分散温度に設定した。
このようにして、下記表１に記載の銀塩の分散物である還元可能な銀塩分散物銀塩分散物Ｂ〜Ｙを得た。
【０２３０】
【表１】

【０２３１】
（還元剤分散物の調製）
《還元剤錯体−１分散物の調製》
還元剤錯体―１（６，６’−ジ−ｔ−ブチル−４，４’−ジメチル−２，２’−ブチリデンジフェノール）とトリフェニルホスフィンオキシドの１：１錯体）１０Ｋｇ、トリフェニルホスフィンオキシド０．１２Ｋｇおよび変性ポリビニルアルコール（クラレ（株）製、ポバールＭＰ２０３）の１０質量％水溶液１６Ｋｇに、水１０Ｋｇを添加して、よく混合してスラリーとした。このスラリーをダイアフラムポンプで送液し、平均直径０．５ｍｍのジルコニアビーズを充填した横型サンドミル（ＵＶＭ−２：アイメックス（株）製）にて４時間３０分分散したのち、ベンゾイソチアゾリノンナトリウム塩０．２ｇと水を加えて還元剤錯体の濃度が２２質量％になるように調製し、還元剤錯体―１分散物を得た。こうして得た還元剤錯体分散物に含まれる還元剤錯体粒子はメジアン径０．４５μｍ、最大粒子径１．４μｍ以下であった。得られた還元剤錯体分散物は孔径３．０μｍのポリプロピレン製フィルターにてろ過を行い、ゴミ等の異物を除去して収納した。
【０２３２】
《還元剤−２分散物の調製》
還元剤―２（６，６’−ジ−ｔ−ブチル−４，４’−ジメチル−２，２’−ブチリデンジフェノール）１０Ｋｇと変性ポリビニルアルコール（クラレ（株）製、ポバールＭＰ２０３）の１０質量％水溶液１６Ｋｇに、水１０Ｋｇを添加して、よく混合してスラリーとした。このスラリーをダイアフラムポンプで送液し、平均直径０．５ｍｍのジルコニアビーズを充填した横型サンドミル（ＵＶＭ−２：アイメックス（株）製）にて３時間３０分分散したのち、ベンゾイソチアゾリノンナトリウム塩０．２ｇと水を加えて還元剤の濃度が２５質量％になるように調製した。この分散液を６０℃で５時間加熱処理し、還元剤―２分散物を得た。こうして得た還元剤分散物に含まれる還元剤粒子はメジアン径０．４０μｍ、最大粒子径１．５μｍ以下であった。得られた還元剤分散物は孔径３．０μｍのポリプロピレン製フィルターにてろ過を行い、ゴミ等の異物を除去して収納した。
【０２３３】
《水素結合性化合物−１分散物の調製》
水素結合性化合物−１（トリ（４−ｔ−ブチルフェニル）ホスフィンオキシド）１０Ｋｇと変性ポリビニルアルコール（クラレ（株）製、ポバールＭＰ２０３）の１０質量％水溶液１６Ｋｇに、水１０Ｋｇを添加して、よく混合してスラリーとした。このスラリーをダイアフラムポンプで送液し、平均直径０．５ｍｍのジルコニアビーズを充填した横型サンドミル（ＵＶＭ−２：アイメックス（株）製）にて３時間３０分分散したのち、ベンゾイソチアゾリノンナトリウム塩０．２ｇと水を加えて水素結合性化合物の濃度が２５質量％になるように調製した。この分散液を８０℃で１時間加温し、水素結合性化合物―１分散物を得た。こうして得た水素結合性化合物分散物に含まれる水素結合性化合物粒子はメジアン径０．３５μｍ、最大粒子径１．５μｍ以下であった。得られた水素結合性化合物分散物は孔径３．０μｍのポリプロピレン製フィルターにてろ過を行い、ゴミ等の異物を除去して収納した。
【０２３４】
《現像促進剤−１分散物の調製》
現像促進剤−１を１０Ｋｇと変性ポリビニルアルコール（クラレ（株）製、ポバールＭＰ２０３）の１０質量％水溶液２０Ｋｇに、水１０Ｋｇを添加して、よく混合してスラリーとした。このスラリーをダイアフラムポンプで送液し、平均直径０．５ｍｍのジルコニアビーズを充填した横型サンドミル（ＵＶＭ−２：アイメックス（株）製）にて３時間３０分分散したのち、ベンゾイソチアゾリノンナトリウム塩０．２ｇと水を加えて現像促進剤の濃度が２０質量％になるように調製し、現像促進剤−１分散物を得た。こうして得た現像促進剤分散物に含まれる現像促進剤粒子はメジアン径０．４８μｍ、最大粒子径１．４μｍ以下であった。得られた現像促進剤分散物は孔径３．０μｍのポリプロピレン製フィルターにてろ過を行い、ゴミ等の異物を除去して収納した。
【０２３５】
現像促進剤−１分散物の調製における現像促進剤−１を、現像促進剤−２および色調調整剤−１に変更し、他は現像促進剤−１分散物の調製と同様にして、現像促進剤−２および色調調整剤−１の固体分散物の２０質量％分散液を得た。
【０２３６】
（ポリハロゲン化合物の調製）
《有機ポリハロゲン化合物−１分散物の調製》
有機ポリハロゲン化合物―１（トリブロモメタンスルホニルベンゼン）１０Ｋｇと変性ポリビニルアルコール（クラレ（株）製ポバールＭＰ２０３）の２０質量％水溶液１０Ｋｇと、トリイソプロピルナフタレンスルホン酸ナトリウムの２０質量％水溶液０．４Ｋｇと、水１４Ｋｇを添加して、よく混合してスラリーとした。このスラリーをダイアフラムポンプで送液し、平均直径０．５ｍｍのジルコニアビーズを充填した横型サンドミル（ＵＶＭ−２：アイメックス（株）製）にて５時間分散したのち、ベンゾイソチアゾリノンナトリウム塩０．２ｇと水を加えて有機ポリハロゲン化合物の濃度が２６質量％になるように調製し、有機ポリハロゲン化合物―１分散物を得た。こうして得たポリハロゲン化合物分散物に含まれる有機ポリハロゲン化合物粒子はメジアン径０．４１μｍ、最大粒子径２．０μｍ以下であった。得られた有機ポリハロゲン化合物分散物は孔径１０．０μｍのポリプロピレン製フィルターにてろ過を行い、ゴミ等の異物を除去して収納した。
【０２３７】
《有機ポリハロゲン化合物−２分散物の調製》
有機ポリハロゲン化合物―２（Ｎ−ブチル−３−トリブロモメタンスルホニルベンゾアミド）１０Ｋｇと変性ポリビニルアルコール（クラレ（株）製ポバールＭＰ２０３）の１０質量％水溶液２０Ｋｇと、トリイソプロピルナフタレンスルホン酸ナトリウムの２０質量％水溶液０．４Ｋｇを添加して、よく混合してスラリーとした。このスラリーをダイアフラムポンプで送液し、平均直径０．５ｍｍのジルコニアビーズを充填した横型サンドミル（ＵＶＭ−２：アイメックス（株）製）にて５時間分散したのち、ベンゾイソチアゾリノンナトリウム塩０．２ｇと水を加えて有機ポリハロゲン化合物の濃度が３０質量％になるように調製した。この分散液を４０℃で５時間加温し、有機ポリハロゲン化合物―２分散物を得た。こうして得たポリハロゲン化合物分散物に含まれる有機ポリハロゲン化合物粒子はメジアン径０．４０μｍ、最大粒子径１．３μｍ以下であった。得られた有機ポリハロゲン化合物分散物は孔径３．０μｍのポリプロピレン製フィルターにてろ過を行い、ゴミ等の異物を除去して収納した。
【０２３８】
《フタラジン化合物−１溶液の調製》
８Ｋｇのクラレ（株）製変性ポリビニルアルコールＭＰ２０３を水１７４．５７Ｋｇに溶解し、次いでトリイソプロピルナフタレンスルホン酸ナトリウムの２０質量％水溶液３．１５Ｋｇとフタラジン化合物―１（６−イソプロピルフタラジン）の７０質量％水溶液１４．２８Ｋｇを添加し、フタラジン化合物―１の５質量％溶液を調製した。
【０２３９】
（メルカプト化合物の調製）
《メルカプト化合物−１水溶液の調製》
メルカプト化合物―１（１−（３−スルホフェニル）−５−メルカプトテトラゾールナトリウム塩）７ｇを水９９３ｇに溶解し、０．７質量％の水溶液とした。
【０２４０】
《メルカプト化合物−２水溶液の調製》
メルカプト化合物―２（１−（３−メチルウレイド）−５−メルカプトテトラゾールナトリウム塩）２０ｇを水９８０ｇに溶解し、２．０質量％の水溶液とした。
【０２４１】
《顔料−１分散物の調製》
Ｃ．Ｉ．Ｐｉｇｍｅｎｔ　Ｂｌｕｅ　６０を６４ｇと花王（株）製デモールＮを６．４ｇに水２５０ｇを添加しよく混合してスラリーとした。平均直径０．５ｍｍのジルコニアビーズ８００ｇを用意してスラリーと一緒にベッセルに入れ、分散機（１／４Ｇサンドグラインダーミル：アイメックス（株）製）にて２５時間分散し、顔料−１分散物を得た。こうして得た顔料分散物に含まれる顔料粒子は平均粒径０．２１μｍであった。
【０２４２】
《ＳＢＲラテックス液の調製》
ＳＢＲラテックスは以下により調整した。
ガスモノマー反応装置（耐圧硝子工業（株）製、ＴＡＳ−２Ｊ型）の重合釜に、蒸留水２８７ｇ、界面活性剤（パイオニンＡ−４３−Ｓ、竹本油脂（株）製、固形分４８．５％）７．７３ｇ、１モル／リットルのＮａＯＨ１４．０６ｍｌ、エチレンジアミン４酢酸４ナトリウム塩０．１５ｇ、スチレン２５５ｇ、アクリル酸１１．２５ｇ、ｔｅｒｔ−ドデシルメルカプタン３．０ｇを入れ、反応容器を密閉し攪拌速度２００ｒｐｍで攪拌した。真空ポンプで脱気し窒素ガス置換を数回繰り返した後、１，３−ブタジエン１０８．７５ｇを圧入して内温を６０℃まで昇温した。ここに過硫酸アンモニウム１．８７５ｇを水５０ｍｌに溶解した液を添加し、そのまま５時間攪拌した。更に９０℃に昇温して３時間攪拌し、反応終了後内温が室温になるまで下げた後、１モル／リットルのＮａＯＨとＮＨ_４ＯＨとを用いて、Ｎａ＋イオン：ＮＨ_４ ^＋イオン＝１：５．３（モル比）になるように添加処理し、ｐＨ８．４に調製した。その後孔径１．０μｍのポリプロピレン製フィルターにてろ過を行い。ゴミ等の異物を除去して収納し、ＳＢＲラテックスを７７４．７ｇ得た。
得られたＳＢＲラテックスのハロゲンイオンをイオンクロマトグラフィーにより測定したところ塩化物イオン濃度が３ｐｐｍであった。更に高速液体クロマトグラフィーによりキレート剤の濃度を測定した結果、１４５ｐｐｍであった。
【０２４３】
上記ラテックスは、平均粒径９０ｎｍ、Ｔｇ１７℃、固形分濃度４４質量％、２５℃６０％における平衡含水率０．６質量％、イオン伝導度４．８０ｍＳ／ｃｍ（イオン伝導度の測定は東亜電波工業（株）製伝導度計ＣＭ−３０Ｓ使用し、ラテックス原液（４４質量％）を２５℃にて測定）、ｐＨ８．４であった。
Ｔｇの異なるＳＢＲラテックスはスチレン、ブタジエンの比率を適宜変更し、同様の方法により調整できる。
【０２４４】
《乳剤層（感光性層）塗布液−１Ａ〜１Ｙの調製》
上記で得た還元可能な銀塩分散物Ａ〜Ｙを表２に示すようにそれぞれ１０００ｇ、水２７６ｍｌ、顔料−１分散物３３ｇ、有機ポリハロゲン化合物−１分散物２１ｇ、有機ポリハロゲン化合物−２分散物５８ｇ、フタラジン化合物―１溶液１７３ｇ、ＳＢＲラテックス（Ｔｇ：１７℃）液１０８２ｇ、還元剤錯体−１分散物２９９ｇ、現像促進剤−１分散物５．７ｇ、メルカプト化合物−１水溶液９ｍｌ、メルカプト化合物−２水溶液２７ｍｌを順次添加し、塗布直前にハロゲン化銀混合乳剤Ａ（塗布用混合乳剤Ａ）１１７ｇを添加してよく混合し、乳剤層（感光性層）塗布液−１Ａ〜１Ｙを調製した。得られた乳剤層塗布液はそのままコーティングダイへ送液した。
塗布液中のジルコニウム量は銀１ｇあたり０．３８ｍｇであった。
【０２４５】
《乳剤層（感光性層）塗布液−２Ａ、２Ｂ、２Ｅ、２Ｌの調製》
上記で得た還元可能な銀塩分散物Ａ、Ｂ、Ｅ、Ｌを表２に示すようにそれぞれ１０００ｇ、水２７６ｍｌ、顔料−１分散物３５ｇ、有機ポリハロゲン化合物−１分散物３２ｇ、有機ポリハロゲン化合物−２分散物４６ｇ、フタラジン化合物−１溶液１７３ｇ、ＳＢＲラテックス（Ｔｇ：１７℃）液１０８２ｇ、還元剤−２分散物１５３ｇ、水素結合性化合物−１分散物５５ｇ、現像促進剤−１分散物４．８ｇ、現像促進剤−２分散物５．２ｇ、色調調整剤−１分散物２．１ｇ、メルカプト化合物−２水溶液８ｍｌを順次添加し、塗布直前にハロゲン化銀混合乳剤Ａ（塗布用混合乳剤Ａ）１４０ｇを添加してよく混合し、乳剤層（感光性層）塗布液−２Ａ、２Ｂ、２Ｅ、２Ｌを調製した。得られた乳剤層塗布液はそのままコーティングダイへ送液した。
塗布液中のジルコニウム量は銀１ｇあたり０．２５ｍｇであった。
【０２４６】
《乳剤面中間層塗布液の調製》
ポリビニルアルコールＰＶＡ−２０５（クラレ（株）製）１０００ｇ、顔料の５質量％分散物２７２ｇ、メチルメタクリレート／スチレン／ブチルアクリレート／ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート／アクリル酸共重合体（共重合重量比６４／９／２０／５／２）ラテックス１９質量％液４２００ｍｌにエアロゾールＯＴ（アメリカンサイアナミド社製）の５質量％水溶液を２７ｍｌ、フタル酸二アンモニウム塩の２０質量％水溶液を１３５ｍｌ、総量１００００ｇになるように水を加え、ｐＨが７．５になるようにＮａＯＨで調整して中間層塗布液とし、９．１ｍｌ／ｍ^２になるようにコーティングダイへ送液した。
塗布液の粘度はＢ型粘度計４０℃（Ｎｏ．１ローター、６０ｒｐｍ）で５８［ｍＰａ・ｓ］であった。
【０２４７】
《乳剤面保護層第１層塗布液の調製》
イナートゼラチン６４ｇを水に溶解し、メチルメタクリレート／スチレン／ブチルアクリレート／ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート／アクリル酸共重合体ラテックス（共重合重量比６４／９／２０／５／２）１９．０質量％液１１２ｇ、フタル酸の１５質量％メタノール溶液を３０ｍｌ、４−メチルフタル酸の１０質量％水溶液２３ｍｌ、０．５ｍｏｌ／Ｌ濃度の硫酸を２８ｍｌ、エアロゾールＯＴ（アメリカンサイアナミド社製）の５質量％水溶液を５ｍｌ、フェノキシエタノール０．５ｇ、ベンゾイソチアゾリノン０．１ｇを加え、総量７５０ｇになるように水を加えて塗布液とし、４質量％のクロムみょうばん２６ｍｌを塗布直前にスタチックミキサーで混合したものを１８．６ｍｌ／ｍ^２になるようにコーティングダイへ送液した。
塗布液の粘度はＢ型粘度計４０℃（Ｎｏ．１ローター、６０ｒｐｍ）で２０［ｍＰａ・ｓ］であった。
【０２４８】
《乳剤面保護層第２層塗布液の調製》
イナートゼラチン８０ｇを水に溶解し、メチルメタクリレート／スチレン／ブチルアクリレート／ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート／アクリル酸共重合体（共重合重量比６４／９／２０／５／２）ラテックス２７．５質量％液１０２ｇ、フッ素系界面活性剤（Ｆ−１）の２質量％溶液を５．４ｍｌ、フッ素系界面活性剤（Ｆ−２）の２質量％溶液を５．４ｍｌ、エアロゾールＯＴ（アメリカンサイアナミド社製）の５質量％溶液を２３ｍｌ、ポリメチルメタクリレート微粒子（平均粒径０．７μｍ）４ｇ、ポリメチルメタクリレート微粒子（平均粒径４．５μｍ）２１ｇ、４−メチルフタル酸１．６ｇ、フタル酸４．８ｇ、０．５ｍｏｌ／Ｌ濃度の硫酸４４ｍｌ、ベンゾイソチアゾリノン１０ｍｇに総量６５０ｇとなるよう水を添加して、４質量％のクロムみょうばんと０．６７質量％のフタル酸を含有する水溶液４４５ｍｌを塗布直前にスタチックミキサーで混合したものを表面保護層塗布液とし、８．３ｍｌ／ｍ^２になるようにコーティングダイへ送液した。
塗布液の粘度はＢ型粘度計４０℃（Ｎｏ．１ローター，６０ｒｐｍ）で１９［ｍＰａ・ｓ］であった。
【０２４９】
《熱現像感光材料−１〜２５の作製》
上記下塗り支持体のバック面側に、ハレーション防止層塗布液をゼラチン塗布量が０．４４ｇ／ｍ^２となるように、またバック面保護層塗布液をゼラチン塗布量が１．７ｇ／ｍ^２となるように同時重層塗布し、乾燥し、バック層を作製した。
【０２５０】
バック面と反対の面に下塗り面から乳剤層、中間層、保護層第１層、保護層第２層の順番でスライドビード塗布方式にて同時重層塗布し、熱現像感光材料の試料を作製した。このとき、乳剤層と中間層は３１℃に、保護層第一層は３６℃に、保護層第二層は３７℃に温度調整した。
【０２５１】
尚、乳剤層は各化合物の塗布量（ｇ／ｍ^２）が以下の塗布量になるように、前記乳剤層塗布液を塗布した。

【０２５２】
塗布はスピード１６０ｍ／ｍｉｎで行い、コーティングダイ先端と支持体との間隙を０．１０〜０．３０ｍｍとし、減圧室の圧力を大気圧に対して１９６〜８８２Ｐａ低く設定した。支持体は塗布前にイオン風にて除電した。
引き続くチリングゾーンにて、乾球温度１０〜２０℃の風にて塗布液を冷却した後、無接触型搬送して、つるまき式無接触型乾燥装置にて、乾球温度２３〜４５℃、湿球温度１５〜２１℃の乾燥風で乾燥させた。
乾燥後、２５℃で湿度４０〜６０％で調湿した後、膜面を７０〜９０℃になるように加熱した。加熱後、膜面を２５℃まで冷却した。
尚、感光性層（乳剤層）の膜厚、及び該感光性層と非感光性層（中間層、保護層第１層、保護層第２層）の合計の膜厚の合計は、表２に記載のとおりである。
【０２５３】
（本発明の熱現像感光材料２６〜２９の作製）
熱現像感光材料１〜２５の作製において、乳剤層塗布液−１Ａ〜１Ｙを２Ａ、２Ｂ、２Ｅ、２Ｌに変更し、更にハレーション防止層から黄色染料化合物−１を除き、バック面保護層、及び乳剤面保護層塗布液のフッ素系界面活性剤を、Ｆ−１及びＦ−２からそれぞれＦ−３及びＦ−４に変更した以外は、熱現像感光材料１〜２５と同様にして本発明の熱現像感光材料２６〜２９を作製した。
【０２５４】
尚、乳剤層は各化合物の塗布量（ｇ／ｍ^２）が以下の塗布量になるように、前記乳剤層塗布液を塗布した。

【０２５５】
【表２】

【０２５６】
以下に本発明の実施例で用いた化合物の化学構造を示す。
【０２５７】
【化３３】

【０２５８】
【化３４】

【０２５９】
【化３５】

【０２６０】
【化３６】

【０２６１】
【化３７】

【０２６２】
［性能の評価］
得られた各試料を半切サイズに切断し、２５℃５０％の環境下で以下の包装材料に包装し、２週間常温下で保管した。
【０２６３】
〔包装材料〕
ＰＥＴ　１０μｍ／ＰＥ　１２μｍ／アルミ箔９μｍ／Ｎｙ　１５μｍ／カーボン３％を含むポリエチレン５０μｍ。
酸素透過率：０ｍｌ／ａｔｍ・ｍ^２・２５℃・ｄａｙ、水分透過率：０ｇ／ａｔｍ・ｍ^２・２５℃・ｄａｙ
【０２６４】
保管した試料は富士メディカルドライレーザーイメージャーＦＭ−ＤＰＬ（最大６０ｍＷ（ＩＩＩＢ）出力の６６０ｎｍ半導体レーザー搭載）にて露光・熱現像（１１２℃−１１９℃−１２１℃−１２１℃に設定した４枚のパネルヒーターで熱現像感光材料１〜２５は合計２４秒、熱現像感光材料２６〜２９は合計１４秒）し、下記に記述の得られた画像の評価を濃度計により行った。
【０２６５】
（感度）
上記で作製した各熱現像感光材料のカブリプラス黒化濃度１．０を得るのに必要な露光量を求め、その逆数を算出し、熱現像感光材料１のカブリプラス黒化濃度１．０を得るのに必要な露光量の逆数を１００とした相対値で示した。その結果を表３に示す。尚、数値が大きい程感度が高いことを示す。
【０２６６】
（生保存性評価）
上記で作製した熱現像感光材料を半切りサイズに切断し、３５℃６０％環境下で１週間保存した後、上記感度評価と同じ条件で感度を評価した。生保存性は１週間保存前の感度に対する１週間保存後の感度の低下の大きさから評価した。その結果を表３に示す。感度の低下が小さいほど生保存性が良好であることを示す。
【０２６７】
（画像保存性の評価）
上記の熱現像後の熱現像感光材料を、２５℃６０％の部屋に置き１００ルクスの蛍光灯のもとで３０日間放置し、カブリ部の濃度を測定した。熱現像処理直後のカブリ濃度に対する上記条件のもとで３０日間保管した後のカブリ部の濃度の変化（増加）を表３に示す。上記条件のもとで３０日間保管した後の熱現像処理直後に対するカブリ部の濃度の増加幅が大きいほど画像保存性が悪いことを示す、つまり上記条件での放置でもカブリの上昇が少ないことが画像保存性に優れていることを示す。
【０２６８】
（加工性の評価）
得られた試料を、しや角１°、刃先角度８９°の上刃と、しや角０°刃先角度９０°の下刃を用い、下刃を固定し、上刃の切断スピードを下刃に対して１ｍ／ｓｅｃで切断した。切断された試料の両切断面を光学顕微鏡で１００倍で観察し、加工性の評価を実施した。
評価は、
◎：全く膜はがれが生じていないし、切断面も滑らか
○：膜はがれは生じていないが表面がざらついている
△：膜はがれが生じているが、手でこすった後も、はがれず残っており、実用上問題ない。
×：膜はがれが生じ、手でこするとはがれる。
【０２６９】
【表３】

【０２７０】
表３の結果は、本発明の熱現像感光材料は、生保存性、熱現像後の画像保存性、及び加工性に優れていることを示している。
【０２７１】
【発明の効果】
本発明は、加工性、生保存性、現像後の画像保存性が改良された熱現像感光材料及びそれを用いた画像形成法を提供することができる。[0001]
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to a photothermographic material having improved processability, raw storability, and image storability after heat development, and an image forming method using the same.
[0002]
[Prior art]
In recent years, in the medical diagnostic film field and the photoengraving film field, it is strongly desired to reduce the amount of processing waste liquid from the viewpoint of environmental protection and space saving. Therefore, thermal development as a medical diagnostic film and a photoengraving film that can be efficiently exposed by a laser image setter or a laser imager and can form a clear black image having high resolution and sharpness. There is a need for techniques relating to photosensitive materials. According to these photothermographic materials, it is possible to supply customers with a heat development processing system that does not require solution processing chemicals and that is simpler and does not impair the environment.
[0003]
There are similar requirements in the field of general image forming materials, but medical diagnostic images in particular require fine depiction, so they require high image quality with excellent sharpness and graininess, and ease of diagnosis. From the viewpoint, a cool black image is preferred. At present, various hard copy systems using pigments and dyes such as inkjet printers and electrophotography are distributed as general image forming systems. However, there is no satisfactory output system for medical images.
[0004]
On the other hand, thermal imaging systems using reducible silver salts are disclosed in, for example, the specifications of U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,152,904 and 3,457,075 and D.C. Klosterboer, “Thermally Processed Silver Systems” (Imaging Processes and Materials), 8th Edition, J. Sturge, V. Sturge. (Walworth, A. Shepp, Chapter 9, page 279, 1989). In particular, the photothermographic material generally contains a catalytically active amount of a photocatalyst (for example, silver halide), a reducing agent, a reducible silver salt (for example, an organic silver salt), and, if necessary, a toning agent that controls the color tone of silver. And a photosensitive layer dispersed in a binder matrix. The photothermographic material is heated to a high temperature (for example, 80 ° C. or higher) after image exposure, and a black silver image is formed by a redox reaction between a reducible silver salt (functioning as an oxidizing agent) and a reducing agent. Form. The oxidation-reduction reaction is promoted by the catalytic action of the latent image of silver halide generated by exposure. Therefore, a black silver image is formed in the exposure area. It is disclosed in many documents including US Pat. No. 2,910,377 and Japanese Examined Patent Publication No. 43-4924.
[0005]
The reducible silver salt used in these photothermographic materials is relatively stable to light, but in the presence of an exposed photocatalyst (such as a latent image of photosensitive silver halide) and a reducing agent, Silver salts that form a silver image when heated to 80 ° C. or higher are conventionally used.
Regarding such non-photosensitive reducible silver salts, paragraph numbers 0048 to 0049 of JP-A Nos. 06-130543, 08-314078, 09-127643 and 10-62899, No. 94074, No. 10-94075, European Patent Publication No. 0,803,764A1, page 18, line 24 to page 19, line 37, European Patent Publication No. 0,962,812A1, No. 1,004. , 930A2, JP-A-11-349591, JP-A-2000-7683, JP-A-2000-72711, JP-A-2000-112057, JP-A-2000-155383, and the like. Silver salts of organic acids, particularly silver salts of long-chain aliphatic carboxylic acids (having 10 to 30, preferably 15 to 28 carbon atoms) are used. Examples include silver behenate, silver arachidate, and silver stearate. And silver oleate, silver laurate, silver caproate, silver myristate, silver palmitate, and mixtures thereof.
[0006]
U.S. Pat. No. 4,504,575 discloses a silver salt of a sulfonic acid, JP-A 52-137321 discloses a silver complex of a tetrazole derivative, JP-A 53-116144, and JP-A 58-118638. No. 2 discloses a silver complex of a triazole derivative, and JP-A 2000-29281 discloses a silver salt of a methacrylic acid / styrene copolymer.
Examples of using silver dicarboxylic acid combined linear alkyl monocarboxylic acid silver and linear alkyl dicarboxylic acid in combination are disclosed in JP-A-4-358144 and JP-A-53-51729.
However, in these conventional technologies, polycarboxylic acids such as dicarboxylic acids are used as additives for improving image quality and storage stability, and polycarboxylic acids such as dicarboxylic acids are used as a silver ion source. No known photothermographic material has been known.
[0007]
In the photothermographic material, as described above, all chemical substances necessary for development are incorporated in the photosensitive material, and an image can be formed by simply applying heat without using a processing solution. It has characteristics. For this reason, the storability of unused photosensitive materials and the storability of processed images have many handicaps compared to conventional photosensitive materials that require processing solutions. Efforts have been made. Further, the conventional photothermographic material contains a large amount of reducible silver salt as a solid content, which causes a problem of deterioration in processability, such as the coating film being easily peeled off.
[0008]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
The problem to be solved by the present invention is to solve the problems of the prior art described above. That is, an object of the present invention is to provide a photothermographic material having improved processability, raw storability, and image storability after development, and an image forming method using the same.
[0009]
[Means for Solving the Problems]
The above objects have been achieved by the present invention described below.
That is, the present invention
<1> A photosensitive silver halide layer containing at least a photosensitive silver halide, an organic silver salt, a reducing agent for the organic silver salt, and a binder on the same surface of the support, and a non-photosensitive layer In the photothermographic material having
The organic silver salt is a non-photosensitive polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt having a molecular weight per mole of silver of 410 or less,
The photothermographic material is characterized in that the total thickness of the photosensitive silver halide layer and the non-photosensitive layer is 5 μm or more and 20 μm or less.
[0010]
<2> The photothermographic material according to <1>, wherein the total thickness of the photosensitive silver halide layer and the non-photosensitive layer is 7 μm or more and 16 μm or less.
<3> The photothermographic material according to <1> or <2>, wherein the photosensitive silver halide layer has a thickness of 3 μm to 15 μm.
[0011]
<4> The photothermographic material according to any one of <1> to <3>, wherein the photosensitive silver halide layer has a thickness of 5 μm to 12 μm.
<5> 1 m of the photothermographic material²<1> to <4>, wherein the total silver amount of the photosensitive silver halide and the non-photosensitive polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt per contact is 0.5 g or more and 1.9 g or less Or the photothermographic material according to any one of the above.
[0012]
<6> The heat development according to any one of <1> to <5>, wherein the non-photosensitive polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt is a compound represented by the following general formula (1): It is a photosensitive material.
M¹O₂CL¹-CO₂M²General formula (1)
(In the general formula (1), L¹Is an alkylene group, alkenylene group, alkynylene group, cycloalkylene group, arylene group, divalent heterocyclic group, -C (= O)-, -O-, -S-, -S (= O)-, -S. (= O)₂-, And -N (R¹)-Represents a divalent group selected from-or a combination thereof. R¹Represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group or a sulfonyl group.
M¹And M²Represents a hydrogen atom or a counter ion, and M¹And M²At least one of represents a silver (I) ion. The compound represented by the general formula (1) may further have a carboxyl group or a salt thereof. )
[0013]
<7> In the general formula (1), L¹The photothermographic material according to <6>, wherein is a group having at least one aromatic group.
<8> An image forming method comprising: an exposure step of scanning and exposing a photothermographic material based on image information; and a developing step of performing a heat development process on the photothermographic material subjected to scanning exposure.
The development step is a step of heat treatment at a temperature of 80 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower for 5 seconds or longer and 20 seconds or shorter,
The image forming method is characterized in that the photothermographic material is the photothermographic material according to any one of <1> to <7>.
<9> The image forming method according to <8>, wherein the development step is a step of heat treatment at a temperature of 100 ° C. to 135 ° C. for 7 seconds to 15 seconds.
[0014]
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
The present invention is described in detail below.
The photothermographic material of the present invention comprises a photosensitive silver halide layer containing at least a photosensitive silver halide, an organic silver salt, a reducing agent for the organic silver salt, and a binder on the same surface of the support, A non-photosensitive layer, wherein the organic silver salt is a non-photosensitive polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt having a molecular weight per silver of 410 or less, and the photosensitive silver halide layer and the non-photosensitive layer The total film thickness is 5 μm or more and 20 μm or less.
[0015]
First, the photosensitive silver halide layer (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “photosensitive layer”) in the photothermographic material of the invention will be described.
The organic silver salt contained in the photosensitive layer in the present invention is relatively stable to light, but was heated to 80 ° C. or higher in the presence of the exposed photosensitive silver halide and reducing agent. In some cases, it is a silver salt that functions as a silver ion supplier and forms a silver image. An organic silver salt is an organic substance that can supply silver ions that can be reduced by a reducing agent. In the present invention, the organic silver salt is a non-photosensitive polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt having a molecular weight of 410 or less per silver mole, and a non-photosensitive polyvalent silver salt having a molecular weight of 370 or less per silver mole. It is preferably a carboxylic acid silver salt, and more preferably a non-photosensitive polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt of 310 or less. When the molecular weight per mole of silver exceeds 410, the film tends to be peeled when the photothermographic material is processed and cut, and it becomes difficult to increase the processing speed.
The organic silver salt is preferably a polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt represented by the following general formula (1).
M¹O₂CL¹-CO₂M²General formula (1)
[0016]
First, the reducible polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt represented by the general formula (1) will be described.
In general formula (1), L¹Is an alkylene group, alkenylene group, alkynylene group, cycloalkylene group, arylene group, divalent heterocyclic group, -C (= O)-, -O-, -S-, -S (= O)-, -S. (= O)₂-, And -N (R¹)-Represents a divalent group selected from-or a combination thereof.
R¹Represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group or a sulfonyl group.
M¹And M²Represents a hydrogen atom or a counter ion. However, M¹And M²At least one of represents a silver (I) ion.
The compound represented by the general formula (1) may further have a carboxyl group as a substituent.
[0017]
In general formula (1), L¹Is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 30 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 2 to 24 carbon atoms (for example, methylene group, ethylene group, trimethylene group, tetramethylene group, pentamethylene group). , Hexamethylene group, heptamethylene group, octamethylene group, nonamethylene group, decamethylene group, undecamethylene group, dodecamethylene group, tridecamethylene group, tetradecamethylene group, pentadecamethylene group, hexadecamethylene group, 1- A methylethylene group, a 1-ethylethylene group, a cyclohexylmethylene group, etc.), an alkenylene group having 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 2 to 24 carbon atoms (for example, vinylene group, propenylene). Group, butylene group, pentynylene group, 4-methyl Pentynylene group, etc.), 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably alkynylene groups having 2 to 24 carbon atoms (for example, ethynylene group, propynylene group, pentynylene group, etc.), 3 to 40, more preferably a cycloalkylene group having 5 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 5 to 24 carbon atoms (for example, 1,2-cyclopropylene group, 1,3-cyclopentylene group, 1,4-cyclohexane). Xylene group, etc.), C6-C40, more preferably C6-C30, particularly preferably C6-C24 arylene groups (e.g. 1,2-phenylene group, 1,3-phenylene group, 1 , 4-phenylene group, 1,8-naphthylene group, 1,5-naphthylene group, etc.), divalent heterocyclic group (2,3-thiophenediyl) 3,4-thiophenediyl group, 3,4-furandiyl group, 2,3-pyrrolediyl group, 1,3-pyrrolediyl group, 1,4-imidazolediyl group, 2,4-imidazolediyl group, 3,4 -Pyrazolediyl group, 2,3-pyridinediyl group, 2,4-pyridinediyl group, 2,5-pyridinediyl group, 2,6-pyridinediyl group, 3,4-pyridinediyl group, 3,5-pyridine Diyl group, 2,3-pyrazinediyl group, 3,6-pyridazinediyl group, 1,2-indolediyl group, 2,8-purinediyl group, 2,4-quinolinediyl group, 1,4-phthalazinediyl group, 2,7 -Naphthyridinediyl group, 2,3-quinoxalinediyl group, 2,4-quinazolinediyl group, 6,7-pteridinediyl group, 2,9-carbazolediyl group, 2,7-ca Ruvazolediyl group, 1,2-pyrrolidinediyl group, 1,3-imidazolinediyl group, 1,2-pyrazolidinediyl group, 3,5-pyrazolidinediyl group, 1,4-piperidinediyl group, 2,4 -Piperidinediyl group, 1,3-isoindolinediyl group, 3,4-morpholinediyl group, etc.), -C (= O)-, -O-, -S-, -S (= O)-, -S (= O)₂-, And -N (R¹)-Represents a divalent group selected from-or a combination thereof.
[0018]
These divalent groups may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group (including a cycloalkyl group and a bicycloalkyl group), an alkenyl group (a cycloalkenyl group, a bicyclo group). Alkenyl group), alkynyl group, aryl group, heterocyclic group, cyano group, hydroxyl group, nitro group, carboxyl group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, silyloxy group, heterocyclic oxy group, acyloxy group, carbamoyloxy group, Alkoxycarbonyloxy group, aryloxycarbonyloxy, amino group (including anilino group), acylamino group, aminocarbonylamino group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryloxycarbonylamino group, sulfamoylamino group, alkyl and arylsulfonylamino group , Mel Pto group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heterocyclic thio group, sulfamoyl group, sulfo group, alkyl and arylsulfinyl group, alkyl and arylsulfonyl group, acyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, carboxyl group, carbamoyl group, Examples include aryl and heterocyclic azo groups, imide groups, phosphino groups, phosphinyl groups, phosphinyloxy groups, phosphinylamino groups, and silyl groups.
When having a carboxyl group as a substituent, the compound represented by the general formula (1) may further have a counter ion such as a silver ion.
[0019]
More specifically, the substituent of the divalent group includes a halogen atom (for example, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom), an alkyl group [a linear, branched, cyclic substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group. Specifically, an alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, t-butyl, n-octyl, icosyl, 2-chloroethyl, 2-cyanoethyl, 2- Ethylhexyl), a cycloalkyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms, such as cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, 4-n-dodecylcyclohexyl), a bicycloalkyl group (preferably having 5 to 5 carbon atoms). 30 substituted or unsubstituted bicycloalkyl groups, that is, monovalent groups obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a bicycloalkane having 5 to 30 carbon atoms, for example, bicyclo [1,2,2] heptan-2-yl , Bicyclo [2,2,2] octane-3-yl), and a tricyclo structure with more ring structures Domo is intended to cover. An alkyl group (for example, an alkyl group of an alkylthio group) in the substituents described below also represents such an alkyl group. ], An alkenyl group [represents a linear, branched or cyclic substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group. Specifically, an alkenyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as vinyl, allyl, prenyl, geranyl, oleyl), a cycloalkenyl group (preferably having 3 to 30 carbon atoms). A substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group, that is, a monovalent group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom of a cycloalkene having 3 to 30 carbon atoms, such as 2-cyclopenten-1-yl and 2-cyclohexen-1-yl; ), A bicycloalkenyl group (a substituted or unsubstituted bicycloalkenyl group, preferably a substituted or unsubstituted bicycloalkenyl group having 5 to 30 carbon atoms, that is, one hydrogen atom of a bicycloalkene having one double bond removed. For example, bicyclo [2,2,1] hept-2-en-1-yl, bicycl [2,2,2] oct-2-en-4-yl). ],
[0020]
An alkynyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as ethynyl, propargyl, trimethylsilylethynyl group), an aryl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, For example, phenyl, p-tolyl, naphthyl, m-chlorophenyl, o-hexadecanoylaminophenyl), a heterocyclic group (preferably a 5- or 6-membered substituted or unsubstituted aromatic or non-aromatic heterocyclic ring A monovalent group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a compound, more preferably a 5- or 6-membered aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms, such as 2-furyl, 2-thienyl, 2-pyrimidinyl, 2-benzothiazolyl), cyano group, hydroxyl group, nitro group, carboxyl group, alkoxy (Preferably, a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms such as methoxy, ethoxy, isopropoxy, t-butoxy, n-octyloxy, 2-methoxyethoxy), aryloxy group (preferably carbon A substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy group of formula 6 to 30, for example, phenoxy, 2-methylphenoxy, 4-t-butylphenoxy, 3-nitrophenoxy, 2-tetradecanoylaminophenoxy), silyloxy group (preferably, A silyloxy group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, such as trimethylsilyloxy, t-butyldimethylsilyloxy), a heterocyclic oxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic oxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, 1-phenyltetrazole -5-oxy, 2-tetrahydropyranyloxy ), An acyloxy group (preferably a formyloxy group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as formyloxy, acetyloxy , Pivaloyloxy, stearoyloxy, benzoyloxy, p-methoxyphenylcarbonyloxy), a carbamoyloxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted carbamoyloxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms such as N, N-dimethylcarbamoyloxy, N , N-diethylcarbamoyloxy, morpholinocarbonyloxy, N, N-di-n-octylaminocarbonyloxy, Nn-octylcarbamoyloxy), an alkoxycarbonyloxy group (preferably a group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms). Substituted or unsubstituted alkoxycarbonyloxy group, for example, methoxycarbonyloxy, ethoxycarbonyloxy, t-butoxycarbonyloxy, n-octylcarbonyloxy), aryloxycarbonyloxy group (preferably substituted or unsubstituted having 7 to 30 carbon atoms) Aryloxycarbonyloxy group of, for example, phenoxycarbonyloxy, p-methoxyphenoxycarbonyloxy, pn-hexadecyloxyphenoxycarbonyloxy),
[0021]
An amino group (preferably an amino group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted anilino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as amino, methylamino, dimethylamino, anilino, N-methyl-anilino, diphenylamino), acylamino group (preferably formylamino group, substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms) Groups such as formylamino, acetylamino, pivaloylamino, lauroylamino, benzoylamino, 3,4,5-tri-n-octyloxyphenylcarbonylamino), aminocarbonylamino groups (preferably substituted with 1 to 30 carbon atoms) Or unsubstituted aminocarbonyl , For example, carbamoylamino, N, N-dimethylaminocarbonylamino, N, N-diethylaminocarbonylamino, morpholinocarbonylamino), alkoxycarbonylamino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxycarbonylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms) , For example, methoxycarbonylamino, ethoxycarbonylamino, t-butoxycarbonylamino, n-octadecyloxycarbonylamino, N-methyl-methoxycarbonylamino), aryloxycarbonylamino group (preferably having 7 to 30 carbon atoms substituted or Unsubstituted aryloxycarbonylamino group such as phenoxycarbonylamino, p-chlorophenoxycarbonylamino, m- (n-octyloxy) phenoxycarbonylamino) Sulfamoylamino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted sulfamoylamino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms, such as sulfamoylamino, N, N-dimethylaminosulfonylamino, Nn-octylaminosulfonylamino ), Alkyl and arylsulfonylamino groups (preferably substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfonylamino having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfonylamino having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methylsulfonylamino, butylsulfonylamino) , Phenylsulfonylamino, 2,3,5-trichlorophenylsulfonylamino, p-methylphenylsulfonylamino),
[0022]
Mercapto group, alkylthio group (preferably substituted or unsubstituted alkylthio group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methylthio, ethylthio, n-hexadecylthio), arylthio group (preferably substituted or unsubstituted arylthio group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms) , For example, phenylthio, p-chlorophenylthio, m-methoxyphenylthio), a heterocyclic thio group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic thio group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as 2-benzothiazolylthio, 1 -Phenyltetrazol-5-ylthio), a sulfamoyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted sulfamoyl group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms, such as N-ethylsulfamoyl, N- (3-dodecyloxypropyl) sulfamoyl, N, N-dimethylsulfamoyl, N-acetyl Sulfamoyl, N-benzoylsulfamoyl, N- (N′-phenylcarbamoyl) sulfamoyl), sulfo group, alkyl and arylsulfinyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfinyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, 6 30 substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfinyl groups such as methylsulfinyl, ethylsulfinyl, phenylsulfinyl, p-methylphenylsulfinyl), alkyl and arylsulfonyl groups (preferably substituted or unsubstituted alkyl having 1 to 30 carbon atoms) Sulfonyl group, 6-30 substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfonyl group such as methylsulfonyl, ethylsulfonyl, phenylsulfonyl, p-methylphenylsulfonyl), acyl group (preferably formyl group, carbon number) To a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, or a heterocyclic ring bonded to the carbonyl group at a substituted or unsubstituted carbon atom having 4 to 30 carbon atoms A carbonyl group such as acetyl, pivaloyl, 2-chloroacetyl, stearoyl, benzoyl, p- (n-octyloxy) phenylcarbonyl, 2-pyridylcarbonyl, 2-furylcarbonyl), an aryloxycarbonyl group (preferably having a carbon number) 7 to 30 substituted or unsubstituted aryloxycarbonyl groups such as phenoxycarbonyl, o-chlorophenoxycarbonyl, m-nitrophenoxycarbonyl, pt-butylphenoxycarbonyl), alkoxycarbonyl groups (preferably having 2 carbon atoms) To 30 Substituted or unsubstituted alkoxycarbonyl groups such as methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, t-butoxycarbonyl, n-octadecyloxycarbonyl),
[0023]
A carboxyl group, a carbamoyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted carbamoyl having 1 to 30 carbon atoms such as carbamoyl, N-methylcarbamoyl, N, N-dimethylcarbamoyl, N, N-di-n-octylcarbamoyl, N -(Methylsulfonyl) carbamoyl), aryl and heterocyclic azo groups (preferably substituted or unsubstituted arylazo groups having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic azo groups having 3 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenylazo P-chlorophenylazo, 5-ethylthio-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-ylazo), imide group (preferably N-succinimide, N-phthalimide), phosphino group (preferably having 2 to 30 carbon atoms) Substituted or unsubstituted phosphino groups such as dimethylphosphite , Diphenylphosphino, methylphenoxyphosphino), phosphinyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phosphinyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phosphinyl, dioctyloxyphosphinyl, diethoxyphosphinyl), phosphini A ruoxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phosphinyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as diphenoxyphosphinyloxy, dioctyloxyphosphinyloxy), a phosphinylamino group (preferably A substituted or unsubstituted phosphinylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, for example, dimethoxyphosphinylamino, dimethylaminophosphinylamino), a silyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms) Silyl groups such as trimethylsilyl, t-butyldimethyl Rushiriru, phenyl dimethylsilyl).
[0024]
Among the above functional groups, those having a hydrogen atom may be substituted with the above groups by removing this. Examples of such functional groups include an alkylcarbonylaminosulfonyl group, an arylcarbonylaminosulfonyl group, an alkylsulfonylaminocarbonyl group, and an arylsulfonylaminocarbonyl group. Examples thereof include methylsulfonylaminocarbonyl, p-methylphenylsulfonylaminocarbonyl, acetylaminosulfonyl, and benzoylaminosulfonyl groups.
[0025]
R above¹Represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group or a sulfonyl group.
R¹The alkyl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group, aryl group, heterocyclic group, acyl group or sulfonyl group in the formula (1) may further have a substituent.¹Preferred examples of these substituents can be given.
[0026]
R above¹As an alkyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, t-butyl, n-octyl, t-octyl, nonyl, decyl, Undecyl, dodecyl, tridecyl, tetradecyl, pentadecyl, hexadecyl, heptadecyl, octadecyl, icosyl, heicosyl, docosyl, 2-chloroethyl, 2-cyanoethyl, 2-ethylhexyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl, 4-n-dodecylcyclohexyl, etc.), aryl group ( Preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenyl, p-tolyl, naphthyl, m-chlorophenyl, o-hexadecanoylaminophenyl), acyl group or sulfonyl group, Preferably, the alkyl group, an aryl group or an acyl group, particularly preferably an acyl group.
[0027]
L¹Represents a composite substituent by a combination of divalent groups, examples of the composite substituent include esters (alkyloxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, carbonate), thiocarboxylic acid esters, dithiocarboxylic acid esters, amides (carbamoyl). , Urea substituted (ureylene), thiourea substituted, sulfonamide (sulfamoyl), imide, hydrazine, hydrazide (hydrazinocarbonyl), amidine, ether, thioether, acyl and the like.
These groups may be further combined and may have a substituent.
[0028]
Preferable examples of the compound represented by the general formula (1) include L¹Is -N (R²)-And a group having at least one divalent complex group by a combination of alkylene groups, R²Is an alkyl group (preferably having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms), an alkenyl group (preferably having 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms). Particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms, an alkynyl group (preferably 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms), an aryl group (preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms). 50, more preferably 6 to 40 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 30 carbon atoms), acyl group (preferably 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms). Or a sulfonyl group (preferably having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably carbon number) To include those that represent 25).
[0029]
L¹-N (R²)-And an alkylene group as a divalent composite group include-(CH)_nN (R²)-(CH)_m-(N and m are preferably 1 to 30),-(CH)_lN (R²)-(CH)_nN (R²)-(CH)_m-(L, n, m are preferably 1 to 30).
These alkylene groups may further have a substituent.
[0030]
As a preferable example of the polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt represented by the general formula (1), L¹Are alkylene groups (preferably having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms), alkenylene groups (preferably having 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms). Particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms, an alkynylene group (preferably 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms), a cycloalkylene group (preferably 3 carbon atoms). To 20, more preferably 5 to 20 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and arylene groups (preferably 6 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms). ) And a divalent heterocyclic group (preferably having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms) Particularly preferably represents at least one having group a group selected from 2 -C 15), and at least one of these groups, -NHCO-R³Group, -CONHR⁴Group, -OCOR⁵Group, -CO₂R⁶Group, -NHSO₂R⁷Group, -SO₂NHR⁸Group, -SO₃R⁹Group, -OSO₂R¹⁰Group (R³~ R¹⁰Is R²And those having as a substituent. L¹May be chain-like or branched.
[0031]
As a preferable example of the polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt represented by the general formula (1), L¹In which is an alkylene group having at least one substituent.
Examples of preferable substituents for alkylene groups include halogen atoms, alkyl groups (including cycloalkyl groups and bicycloalkyl groups), alkenyl groups (including cycloalkenyl groups and bicycloalkenyl groups), alkynyl groups, aryl groups, and heterocyclic rings. Group, cyano group, hydroxyl group, nitro group, carboxyl group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, silyloxy group, heterocyclic oxy group, acyloxy group, carbamoyloxy group, alkoxycarbonyloxy group, aryloxycarbonyloxy group, amino group ( Anilino group), -NHCOR³Group (R³Is R²And aminocarbonylamino group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryloxycarbonylamino group, sulfamoylamino group, alkyl and arylsulfonylamino group, mercapto group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heterocyclic thio group, sulfamoyl Group, sulfo group, alkyl and arylsulfinyl group, alkyl and arylsulfonyl group, acyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, carbamoyl group, aryl and heterocyclic azo group, imide group, phosphino group, phosphinyl group, phosphine group Examples include a ruoxy group, a phosphinylamino group, and a silyl group.
[0032]
More preferably, it is an alkyl group (preferably 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms), an alkenyl group (preferably 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably carbon atoms). 4 to 30, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms, an alkynyl group (preferably 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms), an aryl group (preferably carbon atoms). 6 to 40, more preferably 6 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms, heterocyclic group, alkoxy group (preferably 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably Is an aryloxy group (preferably having 6 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 carbon atoms). 30, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms, a heterocyclic oxy group, an acyloxy group (preferably 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms), carbamoyloxy A group (preferably 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms), an amino group (preferably 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms, especially Preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms), -NHCOR³Group (R³Is R²(Preferably 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms), a sulfamoylamino group (preferably 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms), alkyl and arylsulfonylamino groups (preferably 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms), Sulfamoyl group (preferably having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms), alkyl and arylsulfonyl groups (preferably having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 carbon atoms). To 30, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms, an acyl group (preferably 1 to 1 carbon atoms). 0, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms, an aryloxycarbonyl group (preferably 6 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 6 carbon atoms). 25), an alkoxycarbonyl group (preferably having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms), a carbamoyl group (preferably having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably carbon numbers). 4 to 30, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms).
[0033]
Particularly preferably, an alkyl group (preferably 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms), an alkenyl group (preferably 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably carbon numbers). 4 to 30, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms, an alkynyl group (preferably 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms), an aryl group (preferably carbon atoms). 6 to 40, more preferably 6 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group (preferably 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms, particularly preferably 6 carbon atoms). To 25), an aryloxy group (preferably having 6 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 30 carbon atoms, Preferably C 6 -C 25), - NHCOR³Group (R³Is R²(Preferably having 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 4 to 30 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 6 to 25 carbon atoms).
[0034]
L mentioned as a preferable example of the polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt represented by the general formula (1).¹Examples of the divalent composite group by the combination of —C (═O) — and —O— include acyloxy group, carbamoyloxy group, alkoxycarbonyloxy group, aryloxycarbonyloxy group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryl An oxycarbonylamino group etc. are mentioned.
[0035]
As a preferable example of the polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt represented by the general formula (1), L¹In which is a group having at least one aromatic group. The aromatic group used herein is an aryl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as a phenyl group, p-tolyl group, naphthyl group, m-chlorophenyl group, o-hexadecanoyl group). An aminophenyl group, etc.), an aromatic heterocyclic group (preferably a 5- or 6-membered aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms, such as a 2-furyl group, a 2-thienyl group, a 2-bilimidyl group, 2-benzothiazolyl group, etc.), and these groups may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the aforementioned L¹The substituent which may have may be mentioned.
[0036]
The polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt represented by the general formula (1) is obtained by changing the molecular weight of the polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt represented by the general formula (1) to the polyvalent carboxylic acid represented by the general formula (1). The quotient divided by the number of silver (I) ions in one molecule of silver salt is preferably 130 or more and 410 or less, more preferably 160 or more and 380 or less, and particularly preferably 160 or more and 360 or less.
[0037]
The melting point of the free carboxylic acid of the polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt represented by the general formula (1) is preferably 30 ° C. or higher and 200 ° C. or lower, more preferably 50 ° C. or higher and 180 ° C. or lower, and particularly preferably 65 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower. It is below ℃.
Here, the free carboxylic acid of the polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt represented by the general formula (1) means that all the carboxyl groups in the polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt represented by the general formula (1) are counterions. It refers to a compound derived from a structure in which no salt is formed between molecules, that is, a structure represented by —COOH.
[0038]
The phase transition temperature of the polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt represented by the general formula (1) is preferably 50 ° C. or higher and 180 ° C. or lower, more preferably 70 ° C. or higher and 170 ° C. or lower, and particularly preferably. It is 85 degreeC or more and 150 degrees C or less.
[0039]
In the present invention, the polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt represented by the general formula (1) is preferably 70 mol% or more, more preferably 85 mol% or more, and more preferably 95 mol% or more in the total organic silver. preferable.
[0040]
In the present invention, the polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt represented by the general formula (1) may be used alone or in combination of two or more. The compound used in combination of two or more kinds of the polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt represented by the general formula (1) may be two or more compounds having different planar structural formulas, and geometric isomers, stereoisomers, dia It may be a mixture of isomers such as stereomers and enantiomers.
[0041]
The silver salt of the polyvalent carboxylic acid represented by the general formula (1) may be produced by any known synthesis method, edited by the Chemical Society of Japan, Experimental Chemistry Course 4th edition, Volume 22, pages 1-33, 193. It can be easily produced by those skilled in the art with reference to page -227 and the literature described therein.
[0042]
Specific examples of the polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt represented by the general formula (1) are shown below, but the contents of the present invention are not limited thereto.
[0043]
[Chemical 1]

[0044]
[Chemical 2]

[0045]
[Chemical 3]

[0046]
[Formula 4]

[0047]
[Chemical formula 5]

[0048]
[Chemical 6]

[0049]
[Chemical 7]

[0050]
[Chemical 8]

[0051]
[Chemical 9]

[0052]
Embedded image

[0053]
Embedded image

[0054]
Embedded image

[0055]
Embedded image

[0056]
Embedded image

[0057]
Embedded image

[0058]
Embedded image

[0059]
Embedded image

[0060]
Embedded image

[0061]
Embedded image

[0062]
Embedded image

[0063]
Embedded image

[0064]
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a shape of the organic silver salt (polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt) in this invention, Any of needle shape, rod shape, flat plate shape, and flake shape may be sufficient.
In the present invention, scaly organic silver salts are preferred. Also, short needle-shaped, rectangular parallelepiped, cubic or potato-shaped amorphous particles having a major axis / uniaxial length ratio of 5 or less are preferably used. These organic silver particles have a feature that there is less fog at the time of thermal development than long needle-like particles having a ratio of the major axis to the uniaxial length of 5 or more. In particular, particles having a major axis / uniaxial ratio of 3 or less are preferable because the mechanical stability of the coating film is improved. In the present specification, the scaly organic silver salt is defined as follows. The organic acid silver salt was observed with an electron microscope, the shape of the organic acid silver salt particle was approximated to a rectangular parallelepiped, and the sides of the rectangular parallelepiped were designated as a, b, and c from the shortest side (c was the same as b). Then, the shorter numerical values a and b are calculated, and x is obtained as follows.
x = b / a
In this way, x is obtained for about 200 particles, and when the average value x (average) is obtained, particles satisfying the relationship of x (average) ≧ 1.5 are defined as flakes. Preferably, 30 ≧ x (average) ≧ 1.5, more preferably 15 ≧ x (average) ≧ 1.5. Incidentally, the needle shape is 1 ≦ x (average) <1.5.
[0065]
In the flake shaped particle, a can be regarded as a thickness of a tabular particle having a main plane with b and c as sides. The average of a is preferably 0.01 μm or more and 0.30 μm, and more preferably 0.1 μm or more and 0.23 μm or less. The average of c / b is preferably 1 or more and 6 or less, more preferably 1 or more and 4 or less, still more preferably 1 or more and 3 or less, and particularly preferably 1 or more and 2 or less.
[0066]
The particle size distribution of the organic silver salt is preferably monodispersed. Monodispersion is preferably 100% or less, more preferably 80% or less, and even more preferably 50% of the value obtained by dividing the standard deviation of the lengths of the short and long axes by the short and long axes. It is as follows. The method for measuring the shape of the organic silver salt can be determined from a transmission electron microscope image of the organic silver salt dispersion. As another method for measuring monodispersity, there is a method for obtaining the standard deviation of the volume weighted average diameter of the organic silver salt, and the percentage (variation coefficient) of the value divided by the volume weighted average diameter is preferably 100% or less, more Preferably it is 80% or less, More preferably, it is 50% or less. As a measuring method, for example, it is obtained from the particle size (volume weighted average diameter) obtained by irradiating an organic silver salt dispersed in a liquid with laser light and obtaining an autocorrelation function with respect to the temporal change of the fluctuation of the scattered light. Can do.
[0067]
Known methods and the like can be applied to the production of the reducible organic silver salt used in the present invention and the dispersion method thereof. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-62899, European Patent Publication No. 0803563A1, European Patent Publication No. 0968212A1, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-349591, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-7683, Japanese Patent Application No. 2000-72711, Japanese Patent Application No. 11-348228- No. 30, No. 11-203413, Japanese Patent Application No. 2000-90093, No. 2000-195621, No. 2000-191226, No. 2000-213813, No. 2000-214155, No. 2000-191226, etc. be able to.
[0068]
In addition, when the photosensitive silver salt is allowed to coexist when the reducible organic silver salt is dispersed, the fog may be increased and the sensitivity may be significantly lowered. Therefore, the photosensitive silver salt may be substantially not contained during the dispersion. More preferred.
In the present invention, the amount of photosensitive silver salt in the aqueous dispersion to be dispersed is 0.1 mol% or less with respect to 1 mol of reducible silver salt in the liquid. It is not to be done.
[0069]
In the present invention, a reducible organic silver salt aqueous dispersion and a photosensitive silver salt aqueous dispersion can be mixed to produce a photosensitive material, but the reducible silver salt and photosensitive silver salt mixing ratio (molar ratio) ) Can be selected according to the purpose, but the ratio of the photosensitive silver salt to the reducible silver salt is preferably in the range of 1 to 30 mol%, more preferably 3 to 20 mol%, and particularly preferably 5 to 15 mol%.
Mixing two or more types of reducible organic silver salt water dispersions and two or more types of photosensitive silver salt water dispersions when mixing is a method preferably used for adjusting photographic characteristics.
[0070]
Although the reducible organic silver salt in the present invention can be used in a desired amount, it is 0.1 to 3 g / m as the total silver amount with the photosensitive silver halide described later.²Is preferable, and more preferably 0.5 to 1.9 g / m.²It is.
[0071]
(Reducing agent)
The photosensitive layer in the present invention contains a reducing agent for the organic silver salt. The reducing agent for the organic silver salt may be any substance (preferably an organic substance) that reduces silver ions to metallic silver. Examples of such reducing agents are described in JP-A No. 11-65021, paragraphs 0043 to 0045, and European Patent Publication No. 0803764A1, page 7, line 34 to page 18, line 12.
In the present invention, the reducing agent is preferably a so-called hindered phenol-based reducing agent or bisphenol-based reducing agent having a substituent at the ortho position of the phenolic hydroxyl group, and more preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (R).
[0072]
Embedded image

[0073]
In general formula (R), R¹¹And R¹¹Each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. R¹²And R¹²Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent that can be substituted on the benzene ring. L is a -S- group or -CHR.¹³-Represents a group. R¹³Represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. X¹And X¹Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a group capable of substituting for a benzene ring.
[0074]
The general formula (R) will be described in detail.
In general formula (R), R¹¹And R¹¹Each independently represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and the substituent of the alkyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably an aryl group, a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group. Group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, acylamino group, sulfonamido group, sulfonyl group, phosphoryl group, acyl group, carbamoyl group, ester group, ureido group, urethane group, halogen atom and the like.
[0075]
In general formula (R), R¹²And R¹²Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent capable of substituting for a benzene ring;¹And X¹'Also independently represents a hydrogen atom or a group that can be substituted on a benzene ring. Preferred examples of each group that can be substituted on the benzene ring include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, and an acylamino group.
[0076]
In the general formula (R), L represents an —S— group or —CHR.¹³-Represents a group. R¹³Represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and the alkyl group may have a substituent. R¹³Specific examples of the unsubstituted alkyl group include methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, butyl group, heptyl group, undecyl group, isopropyl group, 1-ethylpentyl group, 2,4,4-trimethylpentyl group and the like. . Examples of substituents for alkyl groups are R¹¹And the same groups as those described above.
[0077]
In general formula (R), R¹¹And R¹¹'Is preferably a secondary or tertiary alkyl group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms, specifically, isopropyl group, isobutyl group, t-butyl group, t-amyl group, t-octyl group, cyclohexyl group, cyclopentyl. Group, 1-methylcyclohexyl group, 1-methylcyclopropyl group and the like. R¹¹And R¹¹'Is more preferably a tertiary alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms, among which a t-butyl group, a t-amyl group, and a 1-methylcyclohexyl group are more preferable, and a t-butyl group is most preferable.
[0078]
In general formula (R), R¹²And R¹²'Is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, specifically, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, butyl group, isopropyl group, t-butyl group, t-amyl group, cyclohexyl group, 1-methyl group. Examples include cyclohexyl group, benzyl group, methoxymethyl group, methoxyethyl group and the like. More preferred are methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group and t-butyl group.
X¹And X¹'Is preferably a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
[0079]
In the general formula (R), L is preferably —CHR.¹³-Group.
R¹³Is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and the alkyl group is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, or a 2,4,4-trimethylpentyl group. R¹³Particularly preferred is a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group or an isopropyl group.
[0080]
In general formula (R), R¹³R is a hydrogen atom, R¹²And R¹²'Is preferably an alkyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms, more preferably an ethyl group or a propyl group, and most preferably an ethyl group.
R¹³Is a primary or secondary alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, R¹²And R¹²'Is preferably a methyl group. R¹³The primary or secondary alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group or an isopropyl group, more preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group or a propyl group.
[0081]
In general formula (R), R¹¹, R¹¹', R¹²And R¹²When both ′ are methyl groups, R¹³Is preferably a secondary alkyl group. In this case R¹³As the secondary alkyl group, isopropyl group, isobutyl group, and 1-ethylpentyl group are preferable, and isopropyl group is more preferable.
The reducing agent is R¹¹, R¹¹', R¹², R¹²'And R¹³Depending on the combination, the heat developability, developed silver color tone, and the like are different. Since these can be adjusted by combining two or more kinds of reducing agents, it is preferable to use two or more kinds in combination depending on the purpose.
[0082]
Although the specific example of the reducing agent of this invention including the compound represented by general formula (R) of this invention below is shown, this invention is not limited to these.
[0083]
Embedded image

[0084]
Embedded image

[0085]
Embedded image

[0086]
In the present invention, the reducing agent is added in an amount of 0.1 to 3.0 g / m.²And more preferably 0.2 to 1.5 g / m.²More preferably, 0.3 to 1.0 g / m²It is. It is preferable that 5-50% mol is contained with respect to 1 mol of silver on the surface having the photosensitive layer, more preferably 8-30 mol%, and further preferably 10-20 mol%. The reducing agent is preferably contained in the photosensitive layer.
[0087]
The reducing agent may be contained in the coating solution by any method such as a solution form, an emulsified dispersion form, or a solid fine particle dispersion form, and may be contained in the photosensitive material.
Well-known emulsifying dispersion methods include dissolving oil using an oil such as dibutyl phthalate, tricresyl phosphate, glyceryl triacetate or diethyl phthalate, or an auxiliary solvent such as ethyl acetate or cyclohexanone, and mechanically emulsifying the dispersion. The method of producing is mentioned.
[0088]
Further, as a solid fine particle dispersion method, a reducing agent powder is dispersed in an appropriate solvent such as water by a ball mill, a colloid mill, a vibration ball mill, a sand mill, a jet mill, a roller mill, or an ultrasonic wave to produce a solid dispersion. A method is mentioned. In this case, a protective colloid (for example, polyvinyl alcohol) or a surfactant (for example, an anionic surfactant such as sodium triisopropylnaphthalenesulfonate (a mixture of three isopropyl groups having different substitution positions)) may be used. Good. In the mills, beads such as zirconia are usually used as a dispersion medium, and Zr and the like eluted from these beads may be mixed in the dispersion. Although it depends on the dispersion conditions, it is usually in the range of 1 ppm to 1000 ppm. If the Zr content in the light-sensitive material is 0.5 mg or less per 1 g of silver, there is no practical problem.
The aqueous dispersion preferably contains a preservative (for example, benzoisothiazolinone sodium salt).
In the present invention, the reducing agent is preferably used as a solid dispersion.
[0089]
(Development accelerator)
In the photosensitive layer in the present invention, a sulfonamide phenol compound represented by the general formula (A) described in JP-A-2000-267222, JP-A-2000-330234, or the like as a development accelerator, Hindered phenol compounds represented by general formula (II) described in JP-A-2001-92075, general formula (I) described in JP-A-10-62895, JP-A-11-15116, and the like, A hydrazine compound represented by the general formula (1) described in Japanese Patent Application No. 2001-074278, a phenol compound represented by the general formula (2) described in Japanese Patent Application No. 2000-76240, or Naphthol compounds are preferably used. These development accelerators are used in the range of 0.1 to 20 mol% with respect to the reducing agent, preferably in the range of 0.5 to 10 mol%, more preferably in the range of 1 to 5 mol%. The introduction method to the light-sensitive material includes the same method as the reducing agent, but it is particularly preferable to add as a solid dispersion or an emulsified dispersion. When added as an emulsified dispersion, it is added as an emulsified dispersion dispersed using a high-boiling solvent that is solid at room temperature and a low-boiling auxiliary solvent, or as a so-called oilless emulsified dispersion that does not use a high-boiling solvent. It is preferable to add.
[0090]
In the present invention, among the development accelerators described above, hydrazine compounds represented by the general formula (1) described in Japanese Patent Application No. 2001-074278 and those described in Japanese Patent Application No. 2000-76240. A phenolic or naphtholic compound represented by the formula (2) is particularly preferred.
Hereinafter, preferred specific examples of the development accelerator of the present invention will be given. The present invention is not limited to these.
[0091]
Embedded image

[0092]
(Hydrogen bonding compound)
When the reducing agent in the present invention has an aromatic hydroxyl group (—OH), particularly in the case of the aforementioned bisphenols, a non-reducing compound having a group capable of forming a hydrogen bond with these groups It is preferable to use together. Examples of the group that forms a hydrogen bond with a hydroxyl group include a phosphoryl group, a sulfoxide group, a sulfonyl group, a carbonyl group, an amide group, an ester group, a urethane group, a ureido group, a tertiary amino group, and a nitrogen-containing aromatic group. Among them, preferred are a phosphoryl group, a sulfoxide group, an amide group (however, it has no> N—H group and is blocked like> N—Ra (Ra is a substituent other than H)), a urethane group. (However, it has no> N—H group and is blocked like> N—Ra (Ra is a substituent other than H)), a ureido group (however, it has no> N—H group,> N-Ra (Ra is a substituent other than H).)
In the present invention, a particularly preferred hydrogen bonding compound is a compound represented by the following general formula (D).
[0093]
Embedded image

[0094]
In general formula (D), R²¹Or R²³Each independently represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an amino group or a heterocyclic group, and these groups may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent. R²¹Or R²³In the case where has a substituent, the substituent is a halogen atom, alkyl group, aryl group, alkoxy group, amino group, acyl group, acylamino group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, sulfonamido group, acyloxy group, oxycarbonyl group, carbamoyl Group, sulfamoyl group, sulfonyl group, phosphoryl group and the like. Preferred as substituents are alkyl groups or aryl groups such as methyl group, ethyl group, isopropyl group, t-butyl group, t-octyl group, phenyl group, 4-alkoxyphenyl group, 4-acyloxyphenyl group and the like can be mentioned.
[0095]
In general formula (D), R²¹Or R²³Specific examples of the alkyl group include methyl group, ethyl group, butyl group, octyl group, dodecyl group, isopropyl group, t-butyl group, t-amyl group, t-octyl group, cyclohexyl group, and 1-methylcyclohexyl group. Benzyl group, phenethyl group, 2-phenoxypropyl group, and the like. Examples of the aryl group include phenyl group, cresyl group, xylyl group, naphthyl group, 4-t-butylphenyl group, 4-t-octylphenyl group, 4-anisidyl group, and 3,5-dichlorophenyl group. Alkoxy groups include methoxy, ethoxy, butoxy, octyloxy, 2-ethylhexyloxy, 3,5,5-trimethylhexyloxy, dodecyloxy, cyclohexyloxy, 4-methylcyclohexyloxy, benzyl An oxy group etc. are mentioned. Examples of the aryloxy group include a phenoxy group, a cresyloxy group, an isopropylphenoxy group, a 4-t-butylphenoxy group, a naphthoxy group, and a biphenyloxy group. Examples of the amino group include a dimethylamino group, a diethylamino group, a dibutylamino group, a dioctylamino group, an N-methyl-N-hexylamino group, a dicyclohexylamino group, a diphenylamino group, and an N-methyl-N-phenylamino group. .
[0096]
In general formula (D), R²¹Or R²³Are preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, or an aryloxy group. In terms of the effect of the present invention, R²¹Or R²³Of these, at least one is preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group, and more preferably two or more are an alkyl group or an aryl group. In addition, R can be obtained at low cost.²¹Or R²³Are preferably the same group.
Specific examples of the hydrogen bonding compound including the compound of the general formula (D) in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
[0097]
Embedded image

[0098]
Embedded image

[0099]
Specific examples of the hydrogen bonding compound include those described in European Patent No. 1096310, Japanese Patent Application Nos. 2000-270498 and 2001-1224796 in addition to the above.
The compound of the general formula (D) of the present invention can be used in a light-sensitive material by being incorporated in a coating solution in the form of a solution, an emulsified dispersion, or a solid dispersion fine particle dispersion in the same manner as the reducing agent. It is preferable to use it as a product. The compound of the present invention forms a hydrogen-bonding complex with a compound having a phenolic hydroxyl group or an amino group in a solution state, and depending on the combination of the reducing agent and the compound of the general formula (D) of the present invention, It can be isolated in the crystalline state. The use of the crystal powder isolated in this way as a solid dispersed fine particle dispersion is particularly preferable for obtaining stable performance. Further, a method in which the reducing agent and the compound of the general formula (D) of the present invention are mixed as a powder and complexed at the time of dispersion with a sand grinder mill or the like using an appropriate dispersant can be preferably used.
The compound of the general formula (D) of the present invention is preferably used in the range of 1 to 200 mol%, more preferably in the range of 10 to 150 mol%, still more preferably 20 to 100 mol, based on the reducing agent. % Range.
[0100]
(Silver halide)
The photosensitive layer in the present invention contains photosensitive silver halide. The photosensitive silver halide is not particularly limited as to the halogen composition, and silver chloride, silver chlorobromide, silver bromide, silver iodobromide, silver iodochlorobromide, and silver iodide can be used. Of these, silver bromide and silver iodobromide are preferred. The distribution of the halogen composition in the grains may be uniform, the halogen composition may be changed stepwise, or may be continuously changed. Further, silver halide grains having a core / shell structure can be preferably used. A preferable structure is a 2- to 5-fold structure, more preferably 2- to 4-fold core / shell particles. A technique for localizing silver bromide or silver iodide on the surface of silver chloride, silver bromide or silver chlorobromide grains can also be preferably used.
[0101]
Methods for forming photosensitive silver halide are well known in the art, for example using the methods described in Research Disclosure No. 17029, June 1978, and US Pat. No. 3,700,458. Specifically, there is used a method in which a photosensitive silver halide is prepared by adding a silver supply compound and a halogen supply compound to gelatin or another polymer solution, and then mixed with an organic silver salt. Further, the method described in paragraph Nos. 0217 to 0224 of JP-A-11-119374, Japanese Patent Application No. 11-98708, and JP-A-2000-347335 are also preferable.
[0102]
The grain size of the photosensitive silver halide is preferably small for the purpose of keeping the cloudiness after image formation low, specifically 0.20 μm or less, more preferably 0.01 μm or more and 0.15 μm or less, and still more preferably. It is preferably 0.02 μm or more and 0.12 μm or less. The grain size here means the diameter when converted into a circular image having the same area as the projected area of silver halide grains (in the case of tabular grains, the projected area of the main plane).
[0103]
Examples of the shape of silver halide grains include cubes, octahedrons, tabular grains, spherical grains, rod-shaped grains, and potato-shaped grains. In the present invention, cubic grains are particularly preferred. Grains with rounded corners of silver halide grains can also be preferably used. The surface index (Miller index) on the outer surface of the photosensitive silver halide grain is not particularly limited, but the ratio of the {100} plane, which has high spectral sensitizing efficiency when adsorbed by the spectral sensitizing dye, is high. preferable. The ratio is preferably 50% or more, more preferably 65% or more, and still more preferably 80% or more. The ratio of the Miller index {100} plane is determined by T.sub. Tani; Imaging Sci. 29, 165 (1985).
[0104]
In the present invention, silver halide grains in which a hexacyano metal complex is present on the outermost surface of the grains are preferred. As the hexacyano metal complex, [Fe (CN)₆]^4-, [Fe (CN)₆]^3-, [Ru (CN)₆]^4-, [Os (CN)₆]^4-, [Co (CN)₆]^3-, [Rh (CN)₆]^3-, [Ir (CN)₆]^3-, [Cr (CN)₆]^3-, [Re (CN)₆]^3-Etc. In the present invention, a hexacyano Fe complex is preferred.
[0105]
The hexacyano metal complex is present in the form of ions in aqueous solution, so the counter cation is not important, but it is easy to mix with water and is suitable for precipitation of silver halide emulsions. Sodium ion, potassium ion, rubidium It is preferable to use alkali metal ions such as ions, cesium ions, and lithium ions, ammonium ions, and alkylammonium ions (for example, tetramethylammonium ions, tetraethylammonium ions, tetrapropylammonium ions, tetra (n-butyl) ammonium ions).
[0106]
In addition to water, the hexacyano metal complex is miscible with a mixed solvent or gelatin with an appropriate organic solvent miscible with water (for example, alcohols, ethers, glycols, ketones, esters, amides, etc.). Can be added.
[0107]
The amount of hexacyano metal complex added is 1 × 10 5 per mole of silver.^-51 x 10 moles or more^-2Or less, more preferably 1 × 10^-41 x 10 moles or more^-3It is below the mole.
[0108]
In order for the hexacyano metal complex to be present on the outermost surface of the silver halide grain, the chalcogen sensitization of sulfur sensitization, selenium sensitization and tellurium sensitization is completed after the addition of the aqueous silver nitrate solution used for grain formation. It is added directly before the completion of the preparation step before the chemical sensitization step for performing noble metal sensitization such as sensitization and gold sensitization, during the washing step, during the dispersion step, or before the chemical sensitization step. In order to prevent the silver halide fine grains from growing, it is preferable to add the hexacyano metal complex immediately after the grain formation, and it is preferable to add it before the completion of the preparation step.
[0109]
The addition of the hexacyano metal complex may be started after adding 96% by mass of the total amount of silver nitrate to be added to form grains, more preferably starting after adding 98% by mass, The addition of 99% by mass is particularly preferable.
[0110]
When these hexacyanometal complexes are added after the addition of the aqueous silver nitrate solution just before the completion of grain formation, they can be adsorbed on the outermost surface of the silver halide grains, and most of them form slightly soluble salts with silver ions on the grain surface. To do. This silver salt of hexacyanoiron (II) is a less soluble salt than AgI, so that re-dissolution by fine particles can be prevented and silver halide fine particles having a small particle size can be produced. .
[0111]
The photosensitive silver halide grain in the invention can contain a metal or metal complex of Group 8 to Group 10 of the Periodic Table (showing Groups 1 to 18). As the central metal of the group 8 to group 10 metal or metal complex of the periodic table, rhodium, ruthenium and iridium are preferable. One kind of these metal complexes may be used, or two or more kinds of complexes of the same metal and different metals may be used in combination. The preferred content is 1 x 10 per mole of silver.^-9From mole to 1 × 10^-3A molar range is preferred. These heavy metals and metal complexes and methods for adding them are described in JP-A-7-225449, JP-A-11-65021, paragraphs 0018 to 0024, and JP-A-11-119374, paragraphs 0227 to 0240.
[0112]
Further, metal atoms that can be contained in the silver halide grains used in the present invention (for example, [Fe (CN)₆]^4-), Desalting methods and chemical sensitization methods for silver halide emulsions, paragraph numbers 0046 to 0050 of JP-A-11-84574, paragraph numbers 0025 to 0031 of JP-A-11-65021, paragraph number 0242 of JP-A-11-119374 ~ 0250.
[0113]
Various gelatins can be used as the gelatin contained in the photosensitive silver halide emulsion used in the present invention. It is necessary to maintain a good dispersion state of the photosensitive silver halide emulsion in the organic silver salt-containing coating solution, and gelatin having a molecular weight of 10,000 to 1,000,000 is preferably used. It is also preferable to phthalate the gelatin substituent. These gelatins may be used at the time of grain formation or at the time of dispersion after desalting, but are preferably used at the time of grain formation.
[0114]
As a sensitizing dye that can be applied to the present invention, it can spectrally sensitize silver halide grains in a desired wavelength region when adsorbed on silver halide grains, and has a spectral sensitivity suitable for the spectral characteristics of the exposure light source. The dye can be advantageously selected. Regarding the sensitizing dye and the addition method, paragraphs 0103 to 0109 of JP-A No. 11-65021, compounds represented by the general formula (II) of JP-A No. 10-186572, and general formulas (I of JP-A No. 11-119374) ) And the dye described in Example 5 of U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,510,236 and 3,871,887, JP-A-2-96131, JP-A-59-48753. Dyes disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 2000-83865, Japanese Patent Application No. 2000-86865, Japanese Patent Application No. 2000-102560, Japanese Patent Application No. 2000-205399, etc. It is described in. These sensitizing dyes may be used alone or in combination of two or more. In the present invention, the time when the sensitizing dye is added to the silver halide emulsion is preferably the time from the desalting step to the coating, and more preferably the time from desalting to the end of chemical ripening.
The addition amount of the sensitizing dye in the present invention can be set to a desired amount in accordance with the sensitivity and the fogging performance, but is 10 per mol of silver halide in the photosensitive layer.^-6~ 1 mol is preferred, more preferably 10^-4-10^-1Is a mole.
[0115]
In the present invention, a supersensitizer can be used to improve spectral sensitization efficiency. As the supersensitizer used in the present invention, European Patent Publication No. 587,338, US Pat. Nos. 3,877,943, 4,873,184, JP-A-5-341432, 11- 109547, 10-111543, etc. are mentioned.
[0116]
The photosensitive silver halide grain in the present invention is preferably chemically sensitized by sulfur sensitizing method, selenium sensitizing method or tellurium sensitizing method. As the compound preferably used in the sulfur sensitization method, selenium sensitization method, and tellurium sensitization method, known compounds such as compounds described in JP-A-7-128768 can be used. In the present invention, tellurium sensitization is particularly preferred. The compounds described in the literature described in paragraph No. 0030 of JP-A-11-65021, and the general formulas (II), (III), (IV) in JP-A-5-313284 The compound shown by is more preferable.
[0117]
The photosensitive silver halide grains in the present invention are preferably chemically sensitized by gold sensitization alone or in combination with the chalcogen sensitization described above. As the gold sensitizer, the valence of gold is preferably +1 or +3, and the gold sensitizer is preferably a gold compound that is usually used. Typical examples include chloroauric acid, bromoauric acid, potassium chloroaurate, potassium bromoaurate, auric trichloride, potassium auric thiocyanate, potassium iodoaurate, tetracyanoauric acid, ammonium aurothiocyanate, pyridyltrichlorogold. Etc. are preferable. Further, gold sensitizers described in US Pat. No. 5,858,637 and Japanese Patent Application No. 2001-79450 are also preferably used.
[0118]
In the present invention, chemical sensitization can be performed at any time after particle formation and before coating. After desalting, (1) before spectral sensitization, (2) simultaneously with spectral sensitization, (3) spectral After sensitization, there may be (4) immediately before application.
The amount of sulfur, selenium and tellurium sensitizers used in the present invention varies depending on the silver halide grains used, chemical ripening conditions, etc., but is 10 per mol of silver halide.^-8-10^-2Moles, preferably 10^-7-10^-3Use about moles.
The amount of the gold sensitizer added varies depending on various conditions, but as a guide, it is 10 per silver halide.^-7From mole 10^-3Mole, more preferably 10^-6Mol ~ 5 × 10^-4Is a mole.
The conditions for chemical sensitization in the present invention are not particularly limited, but the pH is 5 to 8, the pAg is 6 to 11, and the temperature is about 40 to 95 ° C.
A thiosulfonic acid compound may be added to the silver halide emulsion used in the present invention by the method described in European Patent Publication No. 293,917.
[0119]
A reducing agent is preferably used for the photosensitive silver halide grains in the present invention. As specific compounds for the reduction sensitization, ascorbic acid and thiourea dioxide are preferable, and in addition, stannous chloride, aminoiminomethanesulfinic acid, hydrazine derivatives, borane compounds, silane compounds, polyamine compounds, and the like are preferably used. . The reduction sensitizer may be added at any stage in the photosensitive emulsion production process from crystal growth to the preparation process immediately before coating. Further, reduction sensitization is preferably carried out by ripening while maintaining the pH of the emulsion at 7 or more or pAg at 8.3 or less, and reduction sensitization by introducing a single addition portion of silver ions during grain formation. It is also preferable to do.
[0120]
The photosensitive silver halide emulsion in the present invention preferably contains an FED sensitizer (Fragmentable electron donating sensitizer) as a compound that generates two electrons by one photon. As the FED sensitizer, compounds described in US Pat. Nos. 5,747,235, 5747236, 6054260, 599941, and Japanese Patent Application No. 2001-86161 are preferable. As the step of adding the FED sensitizer, any process of the photosensitive emulsion production process from crystal growth to the preparation process immediately before coating is preferable. The amount added varies depending on various conditions, but as a guideline, it is 10 per mol of silver halide.^-7From mole 10^-1Mole, more preferably 10^-6Mol ~ 5 × 10^-2Is a mole.
[0121]
The light-sensitive silver halide emulsion in the light-sensitive material used in the present invention may be one kind or two or more kinds (for example, those having different average grain sizes, different halogen compositions, different crystal habits, chemical increase). Those with different feeling conditions) may be used in combination. The gradation can be adjusted by using a plurality of types of photosensitive silver halides having different sensitivities. Examples of these technologies include JP-A-57-119341, 53-106125, 47-3929, 48-55730, 46-5187, 50-73627, 57-150841 and the like. Can be mentioned. The sensitivity difference is preferably 0.2 log E or more for each emulsion.
[0122]
The amount of photosensitive silver halide added is 1 m of photosensitive material.²Indicated by the amount of applied silver per unit, 0.03-0.6 g / m²Preferably, 0.05 to 0.4 g / m²More preferably, 0.07 to 0.3 g / m²The photosensitive silver halide is preferably 0.01 mol or more and 0.5 mol or less, more preferably 0.02 mol or more and 0.3 mol or less, with respect to 1 mol of the organic silver salt. More preferably, it is 0.03 mol or more and 0.2 mol or less.
[0123]
Regarding the mixing method and mixing conditions of the separately prepared photosensitive silver halide and organic silver salt, the silver halide grains and organic silver salt that were prepared respectively were mixed with a high-speed stirrer, ball mill, sand mill, colloid mill, vibration mill, homogenizer. Etc., or a method of preparing an organic silver salt by mixing photosensitive silver halide that has been prepared at any timing during the preparation of the organic silver salt, etc., but the effect of the present invention is sufficient As long as it appears in, there is no particular limitation. Moreover, mixing two or more organic silver salt aqueous dispersions and two or more photosensitive silver salt aqueous dispersions when mixing is a preferred method for adjusting photographic characteristics.
[0124]
The preferred addition time of the silver halide in the photosensitive layer coating solution in the present invention is from 180 minutes before coating to immediately before, preferably from 60 minutes to 10 seconds before coating. There is no particular limitation as long as the effect of is sufficiently exhibited. Specific mixing methods include mixing in a tank in which the average residence time calculated from the addition flow rate and the amount of liquid fed to the coater is a desired time, and N.I. Harnby, M.M. F. Edwards, A.D. W. There is a method using a static mixer described in Chapter 8 of Nienow's Koji Takahashi "Liquid Mixing Technology" (published by Nikkan Kogyo Shimbun, 1989).
[0125]
(binder)
Any polymer may be used as the binder of the organic silver salt-containing layer of the present invention, and suitable binders are transparent or translucent and generally colorless, and include natural resins, polymers and copolymers, synthetic resins, polymers and copolymers, etc. Film-forming media such as gelatins, rubbers, poly (vinyl alcohol) s, hydroxyethyl celluloses, cellulose acetates, cellulose acetate butyrates, poly (vinyl pyrrolidone) s, casein, starch, poly (acrylic acid) ), Poly (methyl methacrylic acid), poly (vinyl chloride), poly (methacrylic acid), styrene-maleic anhydride copolymers, styrene-acrylonitrile copolymers, styrene-butadiene copolymers , Poly (vinyl acetal) s (eg, poly (vinyl Lumar) and poly (vinyl butyral)), poly (esters), poly (urethane) s, phenoxy resins, poly (vinylidene chloride) s, poly (epoxides), poly (carbonates), poly (vinyl acetate) s , Poly (olefin) s, cellulose esters, and poly (amides). The binder may be coated from water or an organic solvent or emulsion.
[0126]
In the present invention, the glass transition temperature of the binder that can be used in combination with the layer containing the organic silver salt is preferably −20 ° C. or higher and 80 ° C. or lower (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a high Tg binder), and is 0 ° C. or higher and 70 ° C. or lower. More preferably, it is more preferably 10 ° C. or higher and 65 ° C. or lower.
[0127]
In this specification, Tg was calculated by the following formula.
1 / Tg = Σ (Xi / Tgi)
Here, it is assumed that n monomer components from i = 1 to n are copolymerized in the polymer. Xi is the weight fraction of the i-th monomer (ΣXi = 1), and Tgi is the glass transition temperature (absolute temperature) of the homopolymer of the i-th monomer. However, Σ is the sum from i = 1 to n. The homopolymer glass transition temperature value (Tgi) of each monomer was the value of Polymer Handbook (3rd Edition) (by J. Brandrup, EH Immergut (Wiley-Interscience, 1989)).
[0128]
Two or more binders may be used in combination as required. Further, a glass transition temperature of 20 ° C. or higher and a glass transition temperature of less than 20 ° C. may be used in combination. When two or more kinds of polymers having different Tg are blended, the weight (mass) average Tg is preferably within the above range.
[0129]
In the present invention, the organic silver salt-containing layer is preferably applied and dried using a coating solution in which 30% by mass or more of the solvent is water to form a film.
In the present invention, when the organic silver salt-containing layer is formed using a coating solution in which 30% by mass or more of the solvent is water and dried, the binder of the organic silver salt-containing layer is further added to an aqueous solvent ( When it is soluble or dispersible in an aqueous solvent), the performance is improved particularly when it is composed of a latex of a polymer having an equilibrium water content of 2% by mass or less at 25 ° C. and 60%. The most preferable form is one prepared so that the ionic conductivity is 2.5 mS / cm or less, and as such a preparation method, there is a method of performing purification treatment using a separation functional membrane after polymer synthesis.
[0130]
The aqueous solvent in which the polymer is soluble or dispersible here is a mixture of water or water and 70% by mass or less of a water-miscible organic solvent. Examples of the water-miscible organic solvent include alcohols such as methyl alcohol, ethyl alcohol and propyl alcohol, cellosolves such as methyl cellosolve, ethyl cellosolve and butyl cellosolve, ethyl acetate and dimethylformamide.
[0131]
The “equilibrium moisture content at 60 ° C. at 25 ° C.” is as follows using the weight W1 of the polymer in a humidity-controlled equilibrium under an atmosphere of 25 ° C. and 60% and the weight W0 of the polymer in an absolutely dry state at 25 ° C. Can be expressed as
Equilibrium moisture content at 25 ° C. and 60% = {(W1−W0) / W0} × 100 (mass%)
[0132]
For the definition and measurement method of moisture content, for example, Polymer Engineering Course 14, Polymer Material Testing Method (Edited by Society of Polymer Sciences, Jinshokan) can be referred to.
[0133]
The equilibrium water content of the binder polymer of the present invention at 25 ° C. and 60% is preferably 2% by mass or less, more preferably 0.01% by mass or more and 1.5% by mass or less, and further preferably 0.02% by mass. The content is preferably 1% by mass or less.
[0134]
In the present invention, a polymer dispersible in an aqueous solvent is particularly preferred. Examples of the dispersed state may be either latex in which fine particles of water-insoluble hydrophobic polymer are dispersed or polymer molecules dispersed in a molecular state or a micelle, but latex dispersed particles are more suitable. preferable. The average particle size of the dispersed particles is 1 to 50000 nm, preferably 5 to 1000 nm, more preferably 10 to 500 nm, and still more preferably 50 to 200 nm. The particle size distribution of the dispersed particles is not particularly limited, and may have a wide particle size distribution or a monodispersed particle size distribution. Mixing two or more types having a monodispersed particle size distribution is also a preferable method for controlling the physical properties of the coating solution.
[0135]
In the present invention, preferred embodiments of the polymer that can be dispersed in an aqueous solvent include acrylic polymers, poly (esters), rubbers (eg, SBR resin), poly (urethanes), poly (vinyl chloride) s, poly (acetic acid). Hydrophobic polymers such as vinyl), poly (vinylidene chloride) and poly (olefin) can be preferably used. These polymers may be linear polymers, branched polymers, crosslinked polymers, so-called homopolymers obtained by polymerizing a single monomer, or copolymers obtained by polymerizing two or more types of monomers. In the case of a copolymer, it may be a random copolymer or a block copolymer. These polymers have a number average molecular weight of 5,000 to 1,000,000, preferably 10,000 to 200,000. When the molecular weight is too small, the mechanical strength of the emulsion layer is insufficient, and when the molecular weight is too large, the film formability is poor, which is not preferable. A crosslinkable polymer latex is particularly preferably used.
[0136]
(Specific examples of latex)
Specific examples of preferable polymer latex include the following. Below, it represents using a raw material monomer, the numerical value in a parenthesis is the mass%, and molecular weight is a number average molecular weight. When a polyfunctional monomer was used, the concept of molecular weight was not applicable because a crosslinked structure was formed, so it was described as crosslinkability, and the description of molecular weight was omitted. Tg represents the glass transition temperature.
[0137]
Latex of P-1; -MMA (70) -EA (27) -MAA (3)-(molecular weight 37000, Tg 61 ° C.)
Latex of P-2; -MMA (70) -2EHA (20) -St (5) -AA (5)-(molecular weight 40000, Tg 59 ° C.)
P-3; latex of -St (50) -Bu (47) -MAA (3)-(crosslinkability, Tg-17 ° C)
Latex of P-4; -St (68) -Bu (29) -AA (3)-(crosslinkability, Tg 17 ° C.)
Latex of P-5; -St (71) -Bu (26) -AA (3)-(crosslinkability, Tg 24 ° C.)
Latex of P-6; -St (70) -Bu (27) -IA (3)-(crosslinkability)
Latex of P-7; -St (75) -Bu (24) -AA (1)-(crosslinkability, Tg 29 ° C.)
Latex (crosslinkability) of P-8; -St (60) -Bu (35) -DVB (3) -MAA (2)-
Latex (crosslinkability) of P-9; -St (70) -Bu (25) -DVB (2) -AA (3)-
P-10; latex of VC (50) -MMA (20) -EA (20) -AN (5) -AA (5)-(molecular weight 80000)
P-11; latex of VDC (85) -MMA (5) -EA (5) -MAA (5)-(molecular weight 67000)
Latex of P-12; -Et (90) -MAA (10)-(molecular weight 12000)
P-13; Latex of -St (70) -2EHA (27) -AA (3) (molecular weight 130000, Tg 43 ° C)
P-14; latex of MMA (63) -EA (35) -AA (2) (molecular weight 33000, Tg 47 ° C.)
Latex of P-15; -St (70.5) -Bu (26.5) -AA (3)-(crosslinkability, Tg 23 ° C.)
Latex of P-16; -St (69.5) -Bu (27.5) -AA (3)-(crosslinkability, Tg 20.5 ° C)
[0138]
The abbreviations for the above structures represent the following monomers. MMA; methyl methacrylate, EA; ethyl acrylate, MAA; methacrylic acid, 2EHA; 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, St; styrene, Bu; butadiene, AA; acrylic acid, DVB; divinylbenzene, VC; vinyl chloride, AN; Vinylidene chloride, Et; ethylene, IA; itaconic acid.
[0139]
The polymer latex described above is also commercially available, and the following polymers can be used. Examples of acrylic polymers include Sebian A-4635, 4718, 4601 (manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Nipol Lx811, 814, 821, 820, 857 (manufactured by Nippon Zeon Co., Ltd.), poly ( Examples of esters) include: FINETEX ES650, 611, 675, 850 (manufactured by Dainippon Ink & Chemicals, Inc.), WD-size, WMS (manufactured by Eastman Chemical), and other examples of poly (urethanes). Are HYDRAN AP10, 20, 30, 40 (manufactured by Dainippon Ink Chemical Co., Ltd.), and examples of rubbers include LACSTAR 7310K, 3307B, 4700H, 7132C (manufactured by Dainippon Ink Chemical Co., Ltd.) , Nipol Lx416, 410, 438C, 2507 (above Nippon Zeon Co., Ltd.) Examples of poly (vinyl chloride) s such as G351 and G576 (manufactured by Nippon Zeon Co., Ltd.) and the like, and examples of poly (vinylidene chloride) s such as L502 and L513 (manufactured by Asahi Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.) Examples of poly (olefin) s such as Chemipearl S120, SA100 (manufactured by Mitsui Petrochemical Co., Ltd.) and the like.
[0140]
These polymer latexes may be used alone or in combination of two or more as required.
[0141]
(Preferred latex)
As the polymer latex used in the present invention, a styrene-butadiene copolymer latex is particularly preferable. The weight ratio of the styrene monomer unit to the butadiene monomer unit in the styrene-butadiene copolymer is preferably 40:60 to 95: 5. The proportion of the styrene monomer unit and the butadiene monomer unit in the copolymer is preferably 60 to 99% by mass. Moreover, it is preferable that the polymer latex of this invention contains 1-6 mass% of acrylic acid or methacrylic acid with respect to the sum of styrene and butadiene, More preferably, it contains 2-5 mass%. The polymer latex of the present invention preferably contains acrylic acid.
[0142]
Examples of latexes of styrene-butadiene acid copolymer that are preferably used in the present invention include P-3 to P-8,15 described above, commercially available products LACSTAR-3307B, 7132C, Nipol Lx416, and the like.
[0143]
If necessary, a hydrophilic polymer such as gelatin, polyvinyl alcohol, methylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, carboxymethylcellulose may be added to the organic silver salt-containing layer of the light-sensitive material of the present invention. The amount of these hydrophilic polymers added is preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less, based on the total binder of the organic silver salt-containing layer.
[0144]
The organic silver salt-containing layer (that is, the photosensitive layer) of the present invention is preferably formed using a polymer latex. The amount of binder in the organic silver salt-containing layer is such that the weight ratio of total binder / organic silver salt is 1/10 to 10/1, more preferably 1/3 to 5/1, and still more preferably 1/1 to 3/1. / 1 range.
[0145]
In addition, such an organic silver salt-containing layer is usually a photosensitive layer (emulsion layer) containing a photosensitive silver halide which is a photosensitive silver salt. The weight ratio of silver is 400-5, more preferably 200-10.
[0146]
The total binder amount of the photosensitive layer in the present invention is preferably 0.2 to 30 g / m.², More preferably 1-15 g / m²More preferably, 2 to 10 g / m²Range. In the photosensitive layer of the present invention, a crosslinking agent for crosslinking, a surfactant for improving coating properties, and the like may be added.
[0147]
(Preferable solvent for coating solution)
In the present invention, the solvent of the organic silver salt-containing layer coating solution of the light-sensitive material (here, for simplicity, the solvent and the dispersion medium are collectively referred to as a solvent) is preferably an aqueous solvent containing 30% by mass or more of water. As a component other than water, any water-miscible organic solvent such as methyl alcohol, ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, methyl cellosolve, ethyl cellosolve, dimethylformamide, and ethyl acetate may be used. The water content of the solvent of the coating solution is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more. Examples of preferred solvent compositions include water, water / methyl alcohol = 90/10, water / methyl alcohol = 70/30, water / methyl alcohol / dimethylformamide = 80/15/5, water / methyl alcohol / Ethyl cellosolve = 85/10/5, water / methyl alcohol / isopropyl alcohol = 85/10/5, etc. (numerical values are mass%).
[0148]
(Anti-fogging agent)
Antifoggants, stabilizers and stabilizer precursors that can be used in the present invention are paragraph No. 0070 of JP-A-10-62899, page 20, line 57 to page 21, line 7 of European Patent Publication No. 0803764A1. Compounds described in JP-A-9-281737 and JP-A-9-329864, compounds described in US Pat. Nos. 6,083,681, 6,083,681, and European Patent 1048875 It is done. The antifoggant preferably used in the present invention is an organic halide, and examples thereof include those disclosed in the patents described in paragraph Nos. 0111 to 0112 of JP-A No. 11-65021. In particular, an organic halogen compound represented by the formula (P) in JP-A No. 2000-284399, an organic polyhalogen compound represented by the general formula (II) in JP-A No. 10-339934, JP-A No. 2001-31644 and JP-A No. 2001-31644 are disclosed. The organic polyhalogen compounds described in 2001-33911 are preferred.
[0149]
(Description of polyhalogen compounds)
Hereinafter, the organic polyhalogen compound preferable in the present invention will be specifically described. A preferred polyhalogen compound of the present invention is a compound represented by the following general formula (H).
General formula (H)
Q- (Y) n-C (Z₁) (Z₂) X
In the general formula (H), Q represents an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, Y represents a divalent linking group, n represents 0 or 1, Z₁And Z₂Represents a halogen atom, and X represents a hydrogen atom or an electron-withdrawing group.
In general formula (H), Q is preferably an aryl group or a heterocyclic group.
In the general formula (H), when Q is a heterocyclic group, a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic group containing 1 to 2 nitrogen atoms is preferable, and a 2-pyridyl group and a 2-quinolyl group are particularly preferable.
[0150]
In the general formula (H), when Q is an aryl group, Q preferably represents a phenyl group substituted with an electron-withdrawing group in which Hammett's substituent constant σp takes a positive value. Regarding Hammett's substituent constants, Journal of Medicinal Chemistry, 1973, Vol. 16, no. 11, 1207-1216 etc. can be referred to. Examples of such electron-withdrawing groups include halogen atoms (fluorine atoms (σp value: 0.06), chlorine atoms (σp value: 0.23), bromine atoms (σp value: 0.23), iodine atoms ( σp value: 0.18)), trihalomethyl group (tribromomethyl (σp value: 0.29), trichloromethyl (σp value: 0.33), trifluoromethyl (σp value: 0.54)), cyano Group (σp value: 0.66), nitro group (σp value: 0.78), aliphatic / aryl or heterocyclic sulfonyl group (for example, methanesulfonyl (σp value: 0.72)), aliphatic / aryl or Heterocyclic acyl groups (for example, acetyl (σp value: 0.50), benzoyl (σp value: 0.43)), alkynyl groups (for example, C≡CH (σp value: 0.23)), aliphatic / aryl Or heterocyclic oxycarbo Group (for example, methoxycarbonyl (σp value: 0.45), phenoxycarbonyl (σp value: 0.44)), carbamoyl group (σp value: 0.36), sulfamoyl group (σp value: 0.57), Examples thereof include a sulfoxide group, a heterocyclic group, and a phosphoryl group. The σp value is preferably in the range of 0.2 to 2.0, more preferably in the range of 0.4 to 1.0. Particularly preferred as an electron-withdrawing group is a carbamoyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, or an alkylphosphoryl group, and a carbamoyl group is most preferred.
[0151]
In the general formula (H), X is preferably an electron-withdrawing group, more preferably a halogen atom, aliphatic / aryl or heterocyclic sulfonyl group, aliphatic / aryl or heterocyclic acyl group, aliphatic / aryl or heterocyclic group. A ring oxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, and a sulfamoyl group are preferable, and a halogen atom is particularly preferable. Among the halogen atoms, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom are preferable, a chlorine atom and a bromine atom are more preferable, and a bromine atom is particularly preferable.
Y is preferably -C (= O)-, -SO- or -SO.₂-, More preferably -C (= O)-, -SO₂-, Particularly preferably -SO₂-. n represents 0 or 1, and is preferably 1.
Specific examples of the compound of the general formula (H) of the present invention are shown below.
[0152]
Embedded image

[0153]
Embedded image

[0154]
The compound represented by the general formula (H) of the present invention is 10 per mol of the organic silver salt of the photosensitive layer.^-4It is preferably used in the range of ˜1 mol, more preferably 10^-3In the range of ~ 0.5 mol, more preferably 1 × 10^-2It is preferable to use in the range of ~ 0.2 mol.
In the present invention, the antifoggant is added to the light-sensitive material by the method described in the method for containing a reducing agent, and the organic polyhalogen compound is also preferably added as a solid fine particle dispersion.
[0155]
(Other antifoggants)
Examples of other antifoggants include mercury (II) salts described in paragraph No. 0113 of JP-A No. 11-65021, benzoic acids of paragraph No. 0114 of the same, salicylic acid derivatives disclosed in JP-A No. 2000-206642, and formulas described in JP-A No. 2000-221634. A formalin scavenger compound represented by (S), a triazine compound according to claim 9 of JP-A-11-352624, a compound represented by formula (III) of JP-A-6-11791, 4-hydroxy-6-6 And methyl-1,3,3a, 7-tetrazaindene and the like.
[0156]
The photothermographic material in the invention may contain an azolium salt for the purpose of fog prevention. Examples of the azolium salt include compounds represented by general formula (XI) described in JP-A-59-193447, compounds described in JP-B-55-12581, and general formula (II) described in JP-A-60-153039. And the compounds represented. The azolium salt may be added to any part of the photosensitive material, but the addition layer is preferably added to the layer having the photosensitive layer, and more preferably to the organic silver salt-containing layer. The azolium salt may be added in any step of preparing the coating solution. When added to the organic silver salt-containing layer, any step from the preparation of the organic silver salt to the preparation of the coating solution may be performed. To immediately before coating. The azolium salt may be added by any method such as powder, solution, or fine particle dispersion. Moreover, you may add as a solution mixed with other additives, such as a sensitizing dye, a reducing agent, and a color toning agent. In the present invention, the azolium salt may be added in any amount, but 1 × 10 10 per silver mole.^-6Preferred is 1 mol or more and 2 mol or less.^-3More preferably, it is more than mol and less than 0.5 mol.
[0157]
In the present invention, a mercapto compound, a disulfide compound, and a thione compound can be contained in order to suppress or promote development to control development, to improve spectral sensitization efficiency, and to improve storage stability before and after development. JP-A-10-62899, paragraphs 0067 to 0069, JP-A-10-186572, the compound represented by the general formula (I) and specific examples thereof include paragraphs 0033 to 0052, EP 080376A1, No. 20 pages, lines 36-56. Of these, mercapto-substituted heteroaromatic compounds described in JP-A-9-297367, JP-A-9-304875, JP-A-2001-100388, JP-A-2001-104213, JP-A-2001-104214, and the like are preferable.
[0158]
(Coloring agent)
In the photothermographic material of the present invention, it is preferable to add a color toning agent. Regarding the color toning agent, paragraph Nos. 0054 to 0055 of JP-A No. 10-62899, page 21, lines 23 to 48 of European Patent Publication No. 0803764A1, No. 2000-356317 and Japanese Patent Application No. 2000-187298. In particular, phthalazinones (phthalazinone, phthalazinone derivatives or metal salts; for example, 4- (1-naphthyl) phthalazinone, 6-chlorophthalazinone, 5, 7 -Dimethoxyphthalazinone and 2,3-dihydro-1,4-phthalazinedione); phthalazinones and phthalic acids (eg phthalic acid, 4-methylphthalic acid, 4-nitrophthalic acid, diammonium phthalate, sodium phthalate) , Potassium phthalate and tetrachlorophthalic anhydride) Phthalazines (phthalazine, phthalazine derivatives or metal salts; for example 4- (1-naphthyl) phthalazine, 6-isopropylphthalazine, 6-t-butylphthalazine, 6-chlorophthalazine, 5,7-dimethoxyphthalazine and 2 , 3-dihydrophthalazine); a combination of phthalazines and phthalic acids is preferred, and a combination of phthalazines and phthalic acids is particularly preferred. Of these, a particularly preferred combination is a combination of 6-isopropylphthalazine and phthalic acid or 4-methylphthalic acid.
[0159]
(Other additives)
Regarding the plasticizers and lubricants that can be used in the photosensitive layer in the present invention, paragraph No. 0117 of JP-A No. 11-65021, the super-high contrast agent for forming a super-high contrast image, and its addition method and amount are the same. Paragraph No. 0118, JP-A No. 11-223898, Paragraph Nos. 0136 to 0193, JP-A No. 2000-284399, compounds of formula (H), formulas (1) to (3), formulas (A) and (B), and patent application Regarding the compounds of the general formulas (III) to (V) described in JP-A-11-91652 (specific compounds: Chemical Formulas 21 to 24) and the contrast accelerator, JP-A-11-65021, paragraph No. 0102, JP-A-11- No. 223898, paragraph numbers 0194 to 0195.
[0160]
In order to use formic acid or formate as a strong fogging substance, it is preferable to contain 5 mmol or less, more preferably 1 mmol or less per mol of silver on the side having the photosensitive layer containing photosensitive silver halide.
[0161]
When the ultrahigh contrast agent is used in the photothermographic material of the present invention, it is preferable to use an acid formed by hydrating diphosphorus pentoxide or a salt thereof in combination. Acids or salts thereof formed by hydration of diphosphorus pentoxide include metaphosphoric acid (salt), pyrophosphoric acid (salt), orthophosphoric acid (salt), triphosphoric acid (salt), tetraphosphoric acid (salt), hexametalin An acid (salt) etc. can be mentioned. Examples of the acid or salt thereof formed by hydrating diphosphorus pentoxide particularly preferably include orthophosphoric acid (salt) and hexametaphosphoric acid (salt). Specific examples of the salt include sodium orthophosphate, sodium dihydrogen orthophosphate, sodium hexametaphosphate, and ammonium hexametaphosphate.
Amount of acid or salt thereof formed by hydration of diphosphorus pentoxide (1m photosensitive material)²The coating amount per unit) may be a desired amount according to the performance such as sensitivity and fog, but 0.1 to 500 mg / m²Is preferably 0.5 to 100 mg / m²Is more preferable.
[0162]
(Layer structure)
The photothermographic material of the present invention can be provided with a surface protective layer for the purpose of preventing adhesion of the photosensitive layer. The surface protective layer may be a single layer or a plurality of layers. The surface protective layer is described in JP-A No. 11-65021, paragraph numbers [0119] to [0120] and Japanese Patent Application No. 2000-171936.
As the binder for the surface protective layer of the present invention, gelatin is preferable, but it is also preferable to use polyvinyl alcohol (PVA) or a combination thereof. As gelatin, inert gelatin (for example, Nitta gelatin 750), phthalated gelatin (for example, Nitta gelatin 801), and the like can be used. Examples of PVA include those described in paragraphs [0009] to [0020] of JP-A No. 2000-171936. Completely saponified PVA-105, partially saponified PVA-205, PVA-335, and modified Preferred is polyvinyl alcohol MP-203 (trade name, manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd.). Polyvinyl alcohol coating amount of protective layer (per layer) (support 1m²Per unit) as 0.3 to 4.0 g / m²Is preferable, 0.3 to 2.0 g / m²Is more preferable.
[0163]
In particular, when the photothermographic material of the present invention is used for printing applications in which dimensional change is a problem, it is preferable to use a polymer latex for the surface protective layer or the back layer. For such polymer latex, “Synthetic resin emulsion (Hiraku Okuda, Hiroshi Inagaki, published by Kobunshi Publishing (1978))”, “Application of synthetic latex (Takaaki Sugimura, Ikuo Kataoka, Junichi Suzuki, Keiji Kasahara, Takashi "Molecular Publications (1993))" and "Synthetic Latex Chemistry (Muroichi Muroi, published by High Polymers Publication (1970))", specifically, methyl methacrylate (33.5% by mass) / Ethyl acrylate (50 wt%) / methacrylic acid (16.5 wt%) copolymer latex, methyl methacrylate (47.5 wt%) / butadiene (47.5 wt%) / itaconic acid (5 wt%) copolymer Latex, latex of ethyl acrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer, methyl methacrylate (58.9% by mass) / 2-ethyl A latex of xyl acrylate (25.4% by weight) / styrene (8.6% by weight) / 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate (5.1% by weight) / acrylic acid (2.0% by weight) copolymer, methyl methacrylate (64. 0 mass%) / styrene (9.0 mass%) / butyl acrylate (20.0 mass%) / 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate (5.0 mass%) / acrylic acid (2.0 mass%) copolymer latex, etc. Is mentioned. Furthermore, as a binder for the surface protective layer, a combination of polymer latex described in Japanese Patent Application No. 11-6872 and the techniques described in paragraphs [0021] to [0025] of Japanese Patent Application No. 11-143058, Applying the technique described in paragraphs [0027] to [0028] of Japanese Patent Application No. 11-6872 and the technique described in paragraphs [0023] to [0041] of Japanese Patent Application No. 10-199626 Also good. The ratio of the polymer latex in the surface protective layer is preferably 10% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 20% by mass or more and 80% by mass or less of the total binder.
Total binder (including water-soluble polymer and latex polymer) coating amount of surface protective layer (per layer) (support 1m)²As per) 0.3 to 5.0 g / m²Is preferable, 0.3 to 2.0 g / m²Is more preferable.
[0164]
The preparation temperature of the photosensitive layer coating solution in the present invention is preferably from 30 ° C. to 65 ° C., more preferably from 35 ° C. to less than 60 ° C., and more preferably from 35 ° C. to 55 ° C. Moreover, it is preferable that the temperature of the photosensitive layer coating liquid immediately after the addition of the polymer latex is maintained at 30 ° C. or higher and 65 ° C. or lower.
[0165]
The photosensitive layer in the present invention is composed of one or more layers on a support. When the photosensitive layer in the present invention is composed of a single layer, the photosensitive layer comprises an organic silver salt, a photosensitive silver halide, a reducing agent and a binder, and if necessary, a color toning agent, a coating aid and other auxiliary agents. Including additional materials as desired.
When the photosensitive layer in the present invention is composed of two or more layers, the first photosensitive layer (usually a layer adjacent to the support) contains an organic silver salt and photosensitive silver halide, Several other ingredients must be included in the sex layer or both layers. Each photosensitive layer may contain an organic silver salt, a photosensitive silver halide, a reducing agent and a binder.
[0166]
The construction in the case of a multicolor photosensitive photothermographic material may include a combination of these two layers for each color and in a single layer as described in US Pat. No. 4,708,928. All components may be included. In the case of multi-dye multicolor photosensitive photothermographic materials, each emulsion layer is generally functional or non-functional between each photosensitive layer as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,460,681. By using different barrier layers, they are distinguished from each other and held.
[0167]
The photosensitive layer in the present invention has various dyes and pigments (for example, CI Pigment Blue 60, CI Pigment Blue 64, CI) from the viewpoints of color tone improvement, prevention of interference fringes during laser exposure, and prevention of irradiation. Pigment Blue 15: 6) can be used. These are described in detail in International Publication WO98 / 36322, JP-A-10-268465, and 11-338098.
[0168]
In the photothermographic material of the present invention, the antihalation layer can be provided on the side farther from the light source than the photosensitive layer.
[0169]
The photothermographic material of the present invention has a non-photosensitive layer in addition to the photosensitive layer. The non-photosensitive layer includes (1) a protective layer provided on the photosensitive layer (on the side farther from the support), and (2) a plurality of photosensitive layers or between the photosensitive layer and the protective layer. (3) an undercoat layer provided between the photosensitive layer and the support, and (4) a back layer provided on the opposite side of the photosensitive layer. The filter layer is provided on the photosensitive material as the layer (1) or (2). The antihalation layer is provided in the photothermographic material as the layer (3) or (4).
[0170]
Regarding the antihalation layer, paragraphs [0123] to [0124] of JP-A-11-65021, JP-A-11-223898, JP-A-9-230531, JP-A-10-36695, and JP-A-10-104779. 11-231457, 11-352625, 11-352626, and the like.
The antihalation layer contains an antihalation dye having absorption at the exposure wavelength. When the exposure wavelength is in the infrared region, an infrared absorbing dye may be used, and in that case, a dye having no absorption in the visible region is preferable.
When antihalation is performed using a dye having absorption in the visible range, it is preferable that the dye color does not substantially remain after image formation, and a means for decoloring by the heat of heat development is used. In particular, it is preferable to add a thermally decolorable dye and a base precursor to the non-photosensitive layer to function as an antihalation layer. These techniques are described in JP-A-11-231457.
[0171]
The addition amount of the thermodecolorable dye is determined by the use of the dye. In general, the optical density (absorbance) measured at the target wavelength is used in an amount exceeding 0.1. The optical density is preferably 0.2-2. The amount of dye used to obtain such an optical density is generally 0.001 to 1 g / m.²Degree.
[0172]
When the dye is decolored in this way, the optical density after heat development can be reduced to 0.1 or less. Two or more kinds of heat decoloring dyes may be used in combination in a heat decolorable recording material or a photothermographic material. Similarly, two or more kinds of base precursors may be used in combination.
In thermal decolorization using such a thermodecolorable dye and a base precursor, when mixed with a base precursor as described in JP-A-11-352626, a substance that lowers the melting point by 3 ° C. (deg) or more ( For example, it is preferable to use diphenylsulfone, 4-chlorophenyl (phenyl) sulfone), 2-naphthylbenzoate, and the like in terms of thermal decoloring properties.
[0173]
In the photothermographic material of the invention, a colorant having an absorption maximum at 300 to 450 nm can be added for the purpose of improving the silver color tone and the change with time of the image. Such colorants are disclosed in JP-A-62-210458, JP-A-63-104046, JP-A-63-103235, JP-A-63-208846, JP-A-63-306436, and JP-A-63-1314535. JP-A-01-61745, Japanese Patent Application No. 11-276751, and the like.
Such a colorant is usually 1 m of a photothermographic material.²0.1 mg / m when applied per unit²~ 1g / m²The back layer provided on the opposite side of the photosensitive layer is preferable as the layer to be added in the range of.
[0174]
The photothermographic material of the present invention has a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer containing at least one silver halide emulsion on one side of a support, and a so-called single-sided photosensitive layer having a back layer on the other side. A material is preferred.
[0175]
The photothermographic material of the present invention is characterized in that the total thickness of the photosensitive silver halide layer and the non-photosensitive layer is 5 μm or more and 20 μm or less, preferably 7 μm or more and 16 μm or less, More preferably, it is 8 μm or more and 12 μm or less.
If the total film thickness is less than 5 μm, it is difficult to obtain the required maximum image density.
On the other hand, if the total film thickness exceeds 20 μm, film peeling during processing tends to occur, and the processing speed cannot be increased.
[0176]
In the photothermographic material of the invention, the film thickness of the photosensitive silver halide layer is preferably 3 μm or more and 15 μm or less, and more preferably 4 μm or more and 13 μm or less. If the film thickness of the photosensitive silver halide layer is less than 3 μm, it may be difficult to obtain the required maximum image density.
On the other hand, when the film thickness of the photosensitive silver halide layer exceeds 15 μm, film peeling during processing is likely to occur, and the processing speed may not be increased.
[0177]
In the present invention, it is preferable to add a matting agent for improving transportability, and the matting agent is described in paragraph numbers [0126] to [0127] of JP-A No. 11-65021. Matting agent is photothermographic material 1m²When expressed in a coating amount per unit, preferably 1 to 400 mg / m², More preferably 5 to 300 mg / m²It is.
The emulsion surface may have any matte degree as long as no stardust failure occurs, but the Beck smoothness is preferably 30 seconds or more and 2000 seconds or less, and particularly preferably 40 seconds or more and 1500 seconds or less. The Beck smoothness can be easily determined by Japanese Industrial Standard (JIS) P8119 "Smoothness test method using Beck tester for paper and paperboard" and TAPPI standard method T479.
[0178]
In the present invention, the matte degree of the back layer is preferably a Beck smoothness of 1200 seconds or less and 10 seconds or more, preferably 800 seconds or less and 20 seconds or more, and more preferably 500 seconds or less and 40 seconds or more.
[0179]
In the present invention, the matting agent is preferably contained in the outermost surface layer, the layer functioning as the outermost surface layer of the photothermographic material, or a layer close to the outer surface, and also contained in a layer acting as a so-called protective layer. It is preferred that
[0180]
Back layers that can be applied to the present invention are described in paragraph numbers [0128] to [0130] of JP-A No. 11-65021.
[0181]
The photothermographic material of the present invention preferably has a film surface pH of 7.0 or less, more preferably 6.6 or less before heat development. The lower limit is not particularly limited, but is about 3. The most preferred pH range is in the range of 4 to 6.2. The film surface pH is preferably adjusted using an organic acid such as a phthalic acid derivative, a non-volatile acid such as sulfuric acid, or a volatile base such as ammonia from the viewpoint of reducing the film surface pH. In particular, ammonia is volatile and is preferable for achieving a low film surface pH because it can be removed before the coating process or heat development.
Further, it is also preferable to use ammonia in combination with a nonvolatile base such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, or lithium hydroxide. The method for measuring the film surface pH is described in paragraph [0123] of Japanese Patent Application No. 11-87297.
[0182]
In the present invention, a hardener may be used for each layer such as the photosensitive layer, the protective layer, and the back layer. Examples of hardeners include T.W. H. There are methods described in “THE THEORY OF THE PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESS FOURTH EDITION” by James (published by Macmillan Publishing Co., Inc., published in 1977), pages 77 to 87, and chrome alum, 6-hydroxychloro 4-, 4-dichloro -S-triazine sodium salt, N, N-ethylenebis (vinylsulfonacetamide), N, N-propylenebis (vinylsulfonacetamide), polyvalent metal ions described on page 78 of the same, U.S. Pat. No. 4,281, Polyisocyanates such as 060, JP-A-6-208193, epoxy compounds such as US Pat. No. 4,791,042, vinylsulfone-based compounds such as JP-A-62-289048 Compounds such are preferably used.
[0183]
The hardener is added as a solution, and the addition time of this solution to the protective layer coating solution is from 180 minutes before to immediately before application, preferably from 60 minutes to 10 seconds before application. As long as the effects of the present invention are sufficiently exhibited, there is no particular limitation. Specific mixing methods include mixing in a tank in which the average residence time calculated from the addition flow rate and the amount of liquid fed to the coater is a desired time, and N.I. Harnby, M.M. F. Edwards, A.D. W. There is a method using a static mixer described in Chapter 8 of Nienow's Koji Takahashi "Liquid Mixing Technology" (published by Nikkan Kogyo Shimbun, 1989).
[0184]
For the surfactant applicable to the present invention, paragraph No. [0132] of JP-A No. 11-65021, for the solvent, paragraph No. [0133] of the publication, for the support, paragraph No. [0134] of the publication, Alternatively, paragraph number [0135] of the same publication for the conductive layer, paragraph number [0136] of the same publication for the method of obtaining a color image, and paragraph numbers [0061] to [0064] of JP-A No. 11-84573 for the slip agent. ] And paragraph numbers [0049] to [0062] of Japanese Patent Application No. 11-106881.
[0185]
In the present invention, it is preferable to have a conductive layer containing a metal oxide. As the conductive material of the conductive layer, a metal oxide in which conductivity is improved by introducing oxygen defects and different metal atoms into the metal oxide is preferably used.
Examples of metal oxides are ZnO, TiO₂, SnO₂And for ZnO, addition of Al and In, SnO₂For Sb, Nb, P, halogen elements, etc., TiO₂In contrast, addition of Nb, Ta or the like is preferable. Especially SnO with Sb added₂Is preferred.
[0186]
The amount of different atoms added is preferably in the range of 0.01 to 30 mol%, more preferably in the range of 0.1 to 10 mol%. The shape of the metal oxide may be spherical, needle-like, or plate-like, but the long axis / uniaxial ratio is 2.0 or more, preferably 3.0 to 50 in terms of the effect of imparting conductivity. Good.
[0187]
The amount of metal oxide used is preferably 1 mg / m²~ 1000mg / m²In the range, more preferably 10 mg / m²~ 500mg / m²Range, more preferably 20 mg / m²~ 200mg / m²Range. The conductive layer in the present invention may be disposed on either side of the emulsion or on both sides of the back, but is preferably disposed between the support and the back layer. Specific examples of the conductive layer of the present invention are described in JP-A-7-295146 and JP-A-11-223901.
[0188]
In the present invention, it is preferable to use a fluorosurfactant. Specific examples of the fluorosurfactant include compounds described in JP-A Nos. 10-197985, 2000-19680, 2000-214554 and the like. Further, a polymeric fluorine-based surfactant described in JP-A-9-281686 is also preferably used.
In the present invention, it is preferable to use the fluorosurfactants described in Japanese Patent Application Nos. 2000-206560, 2001-203462, 2001-242357, and 2000-264110. In particular, the fluorosurfactants described in Japanese Patent Application Nos. 2001-242357 and 2000-264110 are applied and manufactured with an aqueous coating solution, and the charge adjustment ability, stability on the coated surface, and smoothness are applied. The fluorine-based surfactant described in Japanese Patent Application No. 2001-264110 is most preferable in that it has a high charge adjusting ability and requires a small amount of use.
[0189]
In the present invention, the fluorosurfactant can be used on either the emulsion surface or the back surface, and is preferably used on both surfaces. Further, it is particularly preferable to use in combination with a conductive layer containing the above-described metal oxide. In this case, sufficient performance can be obtained even if the amount of the fluorosurfactant used on the surface having the conductive layer is reduced or removed.
[0190]
The preferred amount of the fluorosurfactant used is 0.1 mg / m for each of the emulsion surface and the back surface.²~ 100mg / m²In the range, more preferably 0.3 mg / m²~ 30mg / m²Range, more preferably 1 mg / m²-10 mg / m²Range. In particular, the fluorosurfactant described in Japanese Patent Application No. 2001-264110 has a large effect and is 0.01 to 10 mg / m.²Is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 5 mg / m²The range of is more preferable.
[0191]
The support that can be used in the photothermographic material of the present invention is preferably a transparent support. The transparent support is a polyester, particularly polyethylene, which has been heat-treated in a temperature range of 130 to 185 ° C. in order to relieve internal strain remaining in the film during biaxial stretching and to eliminate thermal shrinkage strain generated during heat development. Terephthalate is preferably used. In the case of a photothermographic material for medical use, the transparent support may be colored with a blue dye (for example, dye-1 described in Examples of JP-A-8-240877) or may be uncolored. Examples of the support include water-soluble polyesters disclosed in JP-A No. 11-84574, styrene-butadiene copolymers disclosed in JP-A No. 10-186565, paragraph numbers of JP-A No. 2000-39684 and Japanese Patent Application No. 11-106881. It is preferable to apply an undercoating technique such as the vinylidene chloride copolymer of [0063] to [0080]. Further, regarding the antistatic layer or the undercoat, paragraph numbers [0040] of JP-A-56-143430, JP-A-56-143431, JP-A-58-62646, JP-A-56-120519, and JP-A-11-84573. ] To [0051], US Pat. No. 5,575,957, and JP-A-11-223898, paragraphs [0078] to [0084] can be applied.
[0192]
The photothermographic material of the present invention is preferably a monosheet type (a type capable of forming an image on the photothermographic material without using another sheet such as an image receiving material).
[0193]
The photothermographic material of the invention may further contain an antioxidant, a stabilizer, a plasticizer, an ultraviolet absorber or a coating aid. Various additives are added to either the photosensitive layer or the non-photosensitive layer. Regarding these, reference can be made to International Publication No. WO 98/36322, European Patent Publication No. EP 803764A1, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 10-186567, 10-18568, and the like.
[0194]
The photothermographic material in the invention may be applied by any method. Specifically, various types including extrusion coating, slide coating, curtain coating, dip coating, knife coating, flow coating, or extrusion coating using a hopper of the type described in US Pat. No. 2,681,294. A coating operation was used, and Stephen F. Kistler, Peter M. Extrusion coating or slide coating described in pages 399 to 536 of “LIQUID FILM COATING” (CHAPMAN & HALL, 1997) by Schweizer is preferably used, and slide coating is particularly preferably used. An example of the shape of a slide coater used for slide coating is shown in FIG. 11b. 1 If desired, two or more layers may be simultaneously coated by the method described on pages 399 to 536 of the same document, the method described in US Pat. No. 2,761,791 and British Patent No. 837,095. can do.
[0195]
The organic silver salt-containing layer coating solution in the present invention is preferably a so-called thixotropic fluid. Regarding this technique, JP-A-11-52509 can be referred to. In the present invention, the organic silver salt-containing layer coating solution has a shear rate of 0.1 S.^-1The viscosity is preferably 400 mPa · s or more and 100,000 mPa · s or less, and more preferably 500 mPa · s or more and 20,000 mPa · s or less. Also, shear rate 1000S^-1Is preferably 1 mPa · s or more and 200 mPa · s or less, and more preferably 5 mPa · s or more and 80 mPa · s or less.
[0196]
Examples of the technology that can be used for the photothermographic material in the invention include European Patent Publication No. EP80364A1, European Patent Publication No. EP883022A1, International Publication No. WO98 / 36322, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 56-62648, and 58-. 62644, JP-A-9-4376, 9-281737, 9-297367, 9-304869, 9-31405, 9-329865, 10- No. 10669, No. 10-62899, No. 10-69023, No. 10-186568, No. 10-90823, No. 10-171063, No. 10-186655, No. 10-186567 Gazettes, 10-18669 to 10-186572, 1 No. 197974, No. 10-197982, No. 10-197983, No. 10-197985 to No. 10-197987, No. 10-207001, No. 10-207004, No. 10- No. 221807, No. 10-282601, No. 10-288823, No. 10-288824, No. 10-307365, No. 10-312038, No. 10-339934, No. 11-7100 No. 11-15105 No. 11-24200 No. 11-24201 No. 11-24201 No. 11-30832 No. 11-84574 No. 11-65021 No. 11-109547 No. 11-109547 Gazette, 11-125880, 11-129629, 11-133 No. 36 to No. 11-133539, No. 11-133542, No. 11-133543, No. 11-223898, No. 11-352627, No. 11-305377, No. 11-305378. No. 11, No. 11-305384, No. 11-305380, No. 11-316435, No. 11-327076, No. 11-338096, No. 11-338098, No. 11-338099. Gazette, 11-343420 gazette, Japanese Patent Application Nos. 2000-187298, 2000-10229, 2000-47345, 2000-206642, 2000-98530, No. 2000-985311, No. 2000-112059, No. Examples thereof include 2000-112060 specification, 2000-112104 specification, 2000-112004 specification, and 2000-171936 specification.
[0197]
(Packaging material)
The light-sensitive material of the present invention is preferably packaged with a packaging material having low oxygen permeability and / or moisture permeability in order to suppress fluctuations in photographic performance during raw storage or to improve curling, curling, and the like. The oxygen permeability is preferably 50 ml / atm · m 2 · day or less at 25 ° C., more preferably 10 ml / atm · m 2 · day or less, and still more preferably 1.0 ml / atm · m 2 · day or less. The moisture permeability is preferably 10 g / atm · m 2 · day or less, more preferably 5 g / atm · m 2 · day or less, and still more preferably 1 g / atm · m 2 · day or less.
Specific examples of the packaging material having low oxygen permeability and / or moisture permeability are disclosed in, for example, JP-A-8-254793. This is a packaging material described in JP-A-2000-206653.
[0198]
(Heat development)
The photothermographic material of the present invention may be developed by any method, but is usually developed by raising the temperature of the photothermographic material exposed imagewise. A preferred development temperature is 80 to 250 ° C, preferably 100 to 140 ° C, more preferably 110 to 130 ° C. The development time is preferably 1 to 60 seconds, more preferably 3 to 30 seconds, still more preferably 5 to 25 seconds, and 7 to 15 seconds.
In the heat development (step) in the present invention, it is preferable to perform heat treatment at a development temperature of 80 ° C. to 150 ° C., a development time of 5 seconds to 20 seconds, and a development temperature of 100 ° C. to 135 ° C. More preferably, the heat treatment is performed for 7 seconds to 15 seconds.
[0199]
As a thermal development system, either a drum type heater or a plate type heater may be used, but a plate heater system is more preferable. The heat development method using the plate heater method is preferably a method described in JP-A-11-133572. The heat development photosensitive material on which a latent image is formed is brought into contact with a heating means in a heat development part, and heat for obtaining a visible image. In the developing device, the heating unit includes a plate heater, and a plurality of press rollers are disposed to face each other along one surface of the plate heater, and the heat is interposed between the press roller and the plate heater. A thermal development apparatus that performs thermal development by passing a development photosensitive material. It is preferable to divide the plate heater into 2 to 6 stages and lower the temperature about 1 to 10 ° C. at the tip. For example, there are examples in which four sets of plate heaters that can be independently controlled are used and controlled to 112 ° C., 119 ° C., 121 ° C., and 120 ° C., respectively. Such a method is also described in JP-A-54-30032, which can exclude moisture and organic solvents contained in the photothermographic material out of the system, and rapidly develop the photothermographic material. It is also possible to suppress a change in the shape of the support of the photothermographic material due to the heating.
[0200]
The light-sensitive material of the present invention may be exposed by any method, but laser light is preferred as the exposure light source. As the laser light according to the present invention, a gas laser (Ar⁺, He-Ne), YAG laser, dye laser, semiconductor laser and the like are preferable. A semiconductor laser and a second harmonic generation element can also be used. Red to infrared emission gas or semiconductor laser is preferable.
[0201]
As a medical laser imager provided with an exposure part and a heat development part, Fuji Medical Dry Laser Imager FM-DP L can be mentioned. For FM-DP L, Fuji Medical Review No. 8, pages 39 to 55, and it goes without saying that these techniques are applied as a laser imager of the photothermographic material of the present invention. Further, it can also be applied as a photothermographic material for a laser imager in “AD network” proposed by Fuji Medical System as a network system adapted to the DICOM standard.
[0202]
The photothermographic material of the present invention forms a black and white image by a silver image, and is used as a photothermographic material for medical diagnosis, a photothermographic material for industrial photography, a photothermographic material for printing, and a photothermographic material for COM. It is preferably used.
[0203]
【Example】
EXAMPLES Hereinafter, the present invention will be specifically described with reference to examples, but the present invention is not limited to these examples.
<Example 1>
(Preparation of PET support)
Using terephthalic acid and ethylene glycol, PET having an intrinsic viscosity of IV = 0.66 (measured at 25 ° C. in phenol / tetrachloroethane = 6/4 (weight ratio)) was obtained according to a conventional method. This was pelletized, dried at 130 ° C. for 4 hours, melted at 300 ° C., and 0.04 wt% of dye BB having the following structure was contained. Thereafter, the film was extruded from a T-die and quenched to prepare an unstretched film having a thickness such that the film thickness after heat setting was 175 μm.
[0204]
Embedded image

[0205]
This was longitudinally stretched 3.3 times using rolls with different peripheral speeds, and then stretched 4.5 times with a tenter. The temperatures at this time were 110 ° C. and 130 ° C., respectively. Thereafter, the film was heat-fixed at 240 ° C. for 20 seconds and relaxed by 4% in the lateral direction at the same temperature. After slitting the chuck part of the tenter, knurling is performed on both ends and 4 kg / cm.²And a roll having a thickness of 175 μm was obtained.
[0206]
(Surface corona treatment)
Using a solid state corona treatment machine 6KVA model manufactured by Pillar, both surfaces of the support were treated at room temperature at 20 m / min. From the current and voltage readings at this time, the support is 0.375 kV · A · min / m.²It was found that the process was done. The treatment frequency at this time was 9.6 kHz, and the gap clearance between the electrode and the dielectric roll was 1.6 mm.
[0207]

[0208]

[0209]

[0210]
After both surfaces of the biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate support having a thickness of 175 μm are subjected to the corona discharge treatment, the undercoat coating solution formulation {circle around (1)} is applied to one surface (photosensitive layer surface) with a wire bar. .6ml / m²(Per side) and dried at 180 ° C. for 5 minutes, and then the undercoat coating liquid formulation (2) is applied to the back side (back side) with a wire bar at a wet coating amount of 5.7 ml / m.²And then dried at 180 ° C. for 5 minutes. Further, the undercoat coating liquid formulation (3) is applied to the back surface (back surface) with a wire bar so that the wet coating amount is 7.7 ml / m.²And then dried at 180 ° C. for 6 minutes to prepare an undercoat support.
[0211]
(Preparation of back surface coating solution)
(Preparation of solid fine particle dispersion (a) of base precursor)
1.5 kg of base precursor compound-1 and 225 g of a surfactant (trade name: Demol N, manufactured by Kao Corporation), 937.5 g of diphenyl sulfone, butyl ester of parahydroxybenzoate (trade name: platinth, Ueno Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.) 15 g) and distilled water were added and the total amount was adjusted to 5.0 kg and mixed, and the mixed solution was dispersed with beads using a horizontal sand mill (UVM-2: manufactured by Imex Corp.). In the dispersion method, the mixed solution was fed to UVM-2 filled with zirconia beads having an average diameter of 0.5 mm by a diaphragm pump, and dispersed at an internal pressure of 50 hPa or more until a desired average particle size was obtained.
The dispersion was subjected to spectral absorption measurement and dispersed until the ratio of the absorbance at 450 nm to the absorbance at 650 nm (D450 / D650) was 2.2 or more. The obtained dispersion was diluted with distilled water so that the concentration of the above-mentioned base precursor compound-1 was 20% by mass, and filtered for removal of dust (polypropylene filter having an average pore size of 3 μm) for practical use. did.
[0212]
(Preparation of dye solid fine particle dispersion)
6.0 kg of cyanine dye compound-1 and 3.0 kg of sodium p-dodecylbenzenesulfonate, 0.6 kg of surfactant Demol SNB manufactured by Kao Corporation, and antifoaming agent (trade name: Surfynol 104E, Nissin Chemical) Co., Ltd.) 0.15 kg was mixed with distilled water to make a total liquid volume of 60 kg. The mixed solution was dispersed with 0.5 mm zirconia beads using a horizontal sand mill (UVM-2: manufactured by Imex Corporation).
The dispersion was subjected to spectral absorption measurement and dispersed until the ratio of the absorbance at 650 nm to the absorbance at 750 nm (D650 / D750) in the spectral absorption of the dispersion was 5.0 or more. The obtained dispersion was diluted with distilled water so that the concentration of the cyanine dye was 6% by mass, and subjected to filter filtration (average pore size: 1 μm) for removing dust.
[0213]
(Preparation of antihalation layer coating solution)
Gelatin: 30 g, polyacrylamide 24.5 g, 1 mol / l caustic 2.2 g, monodisperse polymethyl methacrylate fine particles (average particle size 8 μm, particle size standard deviation 0.4) 2.4 g, benzoisothiazolinone 0.08 g 35.9 g of the dye solid fine particle dispersion, 74.2 g of the solid fine particle dispersion (a) of the base precursor, 0.6 g of sodium polyethylene sulfonate, 0.21 g of blue dye compound-1 and yellow dye compound-1 0.15 g and 8.3 g of acrylic acid / ethyl acrylate copolymer latex (copolymerization ratio 5/95) were mixed, and the whole was made up to 818 ml with water to prepare an antihalation layer coating solution.
[0214]
(Preparation of back surface protective layer coating solution)
The container was kept at 40 ° C., gelatin: 40 g, liquid paraffin emulsion as liquid paraffin 1.5 g, benzoisothiazolinone 35 mg, 1 mol / l caustic 6.8 g, sodium t-octylphenoxyethoxyethanesulfonate 5 g, 0.27 g of sodium polystyrene sulfonate, 5.4 ml of 2% aqueous solution of fluorosurfactant (F-1), 5.4 ml of 2% aqueous solution of fluorosurfactant (F-2), ethyl acrylate copolymer ( (Copolymerization mass ratio 5/95) 6.0 g and N, N-ethylenebis (vinylsulfoneacetamide) 2.0 g were mixed, and the whole was made up to 1000 ml with water to obtain a back surface protective layer coating solution.
[0215]
(Preparation of silver halide emulsion)
<< Preparation of silver halide emulsion 1 >>
To a solution of 1421 ml of distilled water, 3.1 ml of a 1% by mass potassium bromide solution was added, and a solution containing 3.5 ml of 0.5 mol / L sulfuric acid and 31.7 g of phthalated gelatin was stirred in a stainless steel reaction vessel. While maintaining the liquid temperature at 30 ° C., the solution A diluted with 95.4 ml of distilled water added to 22.22 g of silver nitrate, 15.3 g of potassium bromide and 0.8 g of potassium iodide in a distilled water volume of 97.4 ml. The whole amount of the solution B diluted to 1 was added at a constant flow rate over 45 seconds. Thereafter, 10 ml of a 3.5% by mass aqueous hydrogen peroxide solution was added, and 10.8 ml of a 10% by mass aqueous solution of benzimidazole was further added. Further, a solution C in which distilled water was added to 51.86 g of silver nitrate to be diluted to 317.5 ml, a solution D in which 44.2 g of potassium bromide and 2.2 g of potassium iodide were diluted with distilled water to a volume of 400 ml was added to solution C. Was added at a constant flow rate over 20 minutes, and solution D was added by the controlled double jet method while maintaining pAg at 8.1. 1 x 10 per mole of silver^-4The total amount of potassium hexachloroiridate (III) was added 10 minutes after the start of the addition of Solution C and Solution D so as to have a molar ratio. In addition, 5 seconds after completion of the addition of the solution C, an aqueous solution of potassium iron (II) hexacyanide was added at 3 × 10 5 per mol of silver.^-4The whole molar amount was added. The pH was adjusted to 3.8 using 0.5 mol / L sulfuric acid, stirring was stopped, and a precipitation / desalting / water washing step was performed. The pH was adjusted to 5.9 with 1 mol / L sodium hydroxide to prepare a silver halide dispersion having a pAg of 8.0.
[0216]
The silver halide dispersion was maintained at 38 ° C. with stirring, 5 ml of a 0.34 mass% 1,2-benzisothiazolin-3-one methanol solution was added, and the temperature was raised to 47 ° C. after 40 minutes. 20 minutes after the temperature rise, sodium benzenethiosulfonate was 7.6 × 10 6 in 1 mol of silver with a methanol solution.^-5Mole was added, and after 5 minutes, 2.9 × 10 4 per mole of silver with a tellurium sensitizer C methanol solution.^-4Mole was added and aged for 91 minutes. Thereafter, a methanol solution having a molar ratio of the spectral sensitizing dye A and the sensitizing dye B of 3: 1 is 1.2 × 10 as the total of the sensitizing dyes A and B per mole of silver.^-3After 1 minute, 1.3 ml of a 0.8 mass% methanol solution of N, N′-dihydroxy-N ″ -diethylmelamine was added, and after 4 minutes, 5-methyl-2-mercaptobenzimidazole was added with a methanol solution. 4.8 x 10 per mole of silver^-3Mole, 1-phenyl-2-heptyl-5-mercapto-1,3,4-triazole in a methanol solution to 5.4 × 10 5 per mole of silver^-3Mole and 1- (3-methylureido) -5-merkabutetetrazole sodium salt in aqueous solution at 8.5 × 10 5 per mole of silver^-3A silver halide emulsion 1 was prepared by adding a molar amount.
[0217]
The grains in the prepared silver halide emulsion were silver iodobromide grains containing 3.5 mol% of iodine having an average sphere equivalent diameter of 0.042 μm and a sphere equivalent diameter variation coefficient of 20%. The particle size and the like were determined from an average of 1000 particles using an electron microscope. The {100} face ratio of the particles was determined to be 80% using the Kubelka-Munk method.
[0218]
<< Preparation of silver halide emulsion 2 >>
In the preparation of silver halide emulsion 1, the liquid temperature at the time of grain formation was changed from 30 ° C. to 47 ° C., and solution B was changed to diluting 15.9 g of potassium bromide with distilled water to a volume of 97.4 ml, Solution D was changed to diluting 45.8 g of potassium bromide with distilled water to a volume of 400 ml, and the addition time of solution C was changed to 30 minutes to remove potassium hexacyanoiron (II) in the same manner. A silver halide emulsion 2 was prepared. Precipitation / desalting / washing / dispersion was carried out in the same manner as silver halide emulsion 1. Furthermore, the amount of tellurium sensitizer C added was 1.1 × 10 5 per silver mole.^-4Mole, the addition amount of a 3: 1 methanol solution in the molar ratio of spectral sensitizing dye A and spectral sensitizing dye B is 7.0 × 10 as the sum of sensitizing dye A and sensitizing dye B per mole of silver.^-4Mole, 1-phenyl-2-heptyl-5-mercapto-1,3,4-triazole, 3.3 × 10 3 per mole of silver^-3Mole and 1- (3-Methylureido) -5-mercaptotetrazole sodium salt is 4.7 × 10 4 per mol of silver.^-3Spectral sensitization, chemical sensitization, 5-methyl-2-mercaptobenzimidazole, 1-phenyl-2-heptyl-5-mercapto-1,3, and the like, except that the molar addition was changed. 4-Triazole was added to obtain a silver halide emulsion 2. The emulsion grains of the silver halide emulsion 2 were pure silver bromide cubic grains having an average sphere equivalent diameter of 0.080 μm and a sphere equivalent diameter variation coefficient of 20%.
[0219]
<< Preparation of silver halide emulsion 3 >>
In the preparation of silver halide emulsion 1, silver halide emulsion 3 was prepared in the same manner except that the liquid temperature at the time of grain formation was changed from 30 ° C. to 27 ° C. Further, precipitation / desalting / washing / dispersion was performed in the same manner as silver halide emulsion 1. The molar ratio of spectral sensitizing dye A and spectral sensitizing dye B is 1: 1 as a solid dispersion (gelatin aqueous solution), and the addition amount is 6 × 10 as the total of sensitizing dye A and sensitizing dye B per mole of silver.^-3Mol, tellurium sensitizer C is added in an amount of 5.2 × 10 5 per mol of silver.^-43 minutes after addition of tellurium sensitizer, 5 × 10^-4Moles and potassium thiocyanate 2 x 10 per mole of silver^-3A silver halide emulsion 3 was obtained in the same manner as Emulsion 1 except that a mole was added. The emulsion grains of the silver halide emulsion 3 were silver iodobromide grains containing 3.5 mol% of iodine having an average sphere equivalent diameter of 0.034 μm and a sphere equivalent diameter variation coefficient of 20%.
[0220]
<< Preparation of mixed emulsion A for coating solution >>
70% by weight of silver halide emulsion 1, 15% by weight of silver halide emulsion 2 and 15% by weight of silver halide emulsion 3 were dissolved, and 7% by mole of silver in a 1% by weight aqueous solution of benzothiazolium iodide. × 10^-3Mole was added. Further, the mixed emulsion A for coating solution is hydrolyzed so that the silver halide content is 38.2 g per kg, and the mixed emulsion A for coating solution is 1- (3- Methylureido) -5-mercaptotetrazole sodium salt was added.
[0221]
<< Preparation of reducible silver salt dispersion >>
(1): Preparation of reducible silver salt dispersion A
COGNIS DEUTSCHLAND GmbH behenic acid (product name EDENOR C22-85JP GW) 87.6 kg, distilled water 423 L, 5 mol / L NaOH aqueous solution 49.2 L, tert-butanol 120 L were mixed and stirred at 75 ° C. for 1 hour. Reaction was performed to obtain a sodium behenate solution. Separately, 206.2 L (pH 4.0) of an aqueous solution containing 40.4 kg of silver nitrate was prepared and kept warm at 10 ° C. A reaction vessel containing 635 L of distilled water and 30 L of tert-butanol was kept at 30 ° C., and with sufficient stirring, the total amount of the previous sodium behenate solution and the total amount of silver nitrate aqueous solution were 93 minutes and 15 seconds at a constant flow rate, respectively. Added over 90 minutes.
At this time, only the silver nitrate aqueous solution is added for 11 minutes after the start of the addition of the aqueous silver nitrate solution, and then the addition of the sodium behenate solution is started. After the addition of the aqueous silver nitrate solution, only the sodium behenate solution is added for 14 minutes and 15 seconds. It was made to be. At this time, the temperature in the reaction vessel was 30 ° C., and the external temperature was controlled so that the liquid temperature was constant. The pipe of the addition system for the sodium behenate solution was kept warm by circulating hot water outside the double pipe so that the liquid temperature at the outlet at the tip of the addition nozzle was 75 ° C. Moreover, the piping of the addition system of the silver nitrate aqueous solution was kept warm by circulating cold water outside the double pipe. The addition position of the sodium behenate solution and the addition position of the aqueous silver nitrate solution were arranged symmetrically around the stirring axis, and were adjusted so as not to contact the reaction solution.
[0222]
After completion of the addition of the sodium behenate solution, the mixture was left stirring for 20 minutes at the same temperature, heated to 35 ° C. over 30 minutes, and then aged for 210 minutes. Immediately after completion of aging, the solid content was separated by centrifugal filtration, and the solid content was washed with water until the conductivity of filtered water reached 30 μS / cm.
At that time, in order to promote a decrease in conductivity, an operation of adding pure water to the wet cake to form a slurry was performed three times. The obtained fatty acid silver wet cake was shaken off for 1 hour while the centrifugal force G was 700. G is 1.119 × 10^-5× Container radius (cm) × Number of rotations (rpm)²It is expressed.
The solid content of the fatty acid silver wet cake thus obtained (measured by drying 1 g of the wet cake at 110 ° C. for 2 hours) was 44%.
[0223]
When the morphology of the obtained silver behenate particles was evaluated by electron microscope photography, the average values were a = 0.14 μm, b = 0.4 μm, c = 0.6 μm, average aspect ratio 5.2, average sphere equivalent diameter. It was a flake-like crystal having a variation coefficient of 15% for a sphere equivalent diameter of 0.52 μm. (A, b, and c are the text provisions)
[0224]
19.3 kg of polyvinyl alcohol (trade name: PVA-217) and water are added to a wet cake corresponding to a dry solid content of 260 kg to make a total amount of 1000 kg, and then slurried with a dissolver blade. : PM-10 type).
[0225]
Next, the pre-dispersed stock solution is subjected to a pressure of 1260 kg / cm of a disperser (trade name: Microfluidizer M-610, manufactured by Microfluidics International Corporation, using a Z-type interaction chamber).²And was treated three times to obtain a silver behenate dispersion. The cooling operation was carried out by installing a serpentine heat exchanger before and after the interaction chamber, and adjusting the temperature of the refrigerant to a dispersion temperature of 18 ° C.
Thus, a reducible silver salt dispersion A which is a dispersion of silver behenate C-1 represented by the following structural formula was obtained.
C-1
CH₃(CH₂)₂₀COOAg
[0226]
(2): Preparation of reducible silver salt dispersions B to Y
Similar to the preparation of reducible silver salt dispersion A, COGNIS DETSCHLAND DmbH behenic acid (product name EDENOR C22-85JP GW) with an equimolar amount of a compound as a carboxyl group (described in Table 1), distilled water 423L 49.2 L of 5 mol / L NaOH aqueous solution and 120 L of tert-butanol were mixed and stirred at 75 ° C. for 1 hour to obtain a sodium salt solution. Separately, 206.2 L (pH 4.0) of an aqueous solution containing 40.4 kg of silver nitrate was prepared and kept warm at 10 ° C. A reaction vessel containing 635 L of distilled water and 30 L of tert-butanol was kept at 30 ° C., and with sufficient agitation, the total amount of the sodium salt solution and the total amount of the aqueous silver nitrate solution were kept at a constant flow rate of 93 minutes 15 seconds and 90 respectively. Added over minutes. At this time, only the aqueous silver nitrate solution is added for 11 minutes after the start of the addition of the aqueous silver nitrate solution, after which the addition of the sodium salt solution is started, and only the sodium salt solution is added for 14 minutes and 15 seconds after the addition of the aqueous silver nitrate solution is completed. I did it. At this time, the temperature in the reaction vessel was 30 ° C., and the external temperature was controlled so that the liquid temperature was constant.
The piping of the sodium salt solution addition system was prepared such that warm water was circulated outside the double tube so that the liquid temperature at the outlet at the tip of the addition nozzle was 75 ° C. Moreover, the piping of the addition system of the silver nitrate aqueous solution was kept warm by circulating cold water outside the double pipe. The addition position of the sodium salt solution and the addition position of the aqueous silver nitrate solution were arranged symmetrically with respect to the stirring axis, and were adjusted so as not to contact the reaction solution.
[0227]
After completion of the addition of the sodium salt solution, the mixture was left stirring for 20 minutes at the same temperature, heated to 35 ° C. over 30 minutes, and then aged for 210 minutes. Immediately after completion of aging, the solid content was separated by centrifugal filtration, and the solid content was washed with water until the conductivity of filtered water reached 30 μS / cm.
At that time, in order to promote a decrease in conductivity, an operation of adding pure water to the wet cake to form a slurry was performed three times. The obtained fatty acid silver wet cake was shaken off for 1 hour while the centrifugal force G was 700. G is 1.119 × 10^-5× Container radius (cm) × Number of rotations (rpm)²It is expressed.
[0228]
19.3 kg of polyvinyl alcohol (trade name: PVA-217) and water are added to the amount of wet cake necessary to obtain the same silver content as the silver salt dispersion A, and the total amount is set to 1000 kg. And pre-dispersed with a pipeline mixer (Mizho Kogyo Co., Ltd .: PM-10 type).
[0229]
Next, the pre-dispersed stock solution is subjected to a pressure of 1260 kg / cm of a disperser (trade name: Microfluidizer M-610, manufactured by Microfluidics International Corporation, using a Z-type interaction chamber).²And was treated three times to obtain a silver behenate dispersion. The cooling operation was carried out by installing a serpentine heat exchanger before and after the interaction chamber, and adjusting the temperature of the refrigerant to a dispersion temperature of 18 ° C.
Thus, reducible silver salt dispersions silver salt dispersions B to Y, which are silver salt dispersions described in Table 1 below, were obtained.
[0230]
[Table 1]

[0231]
(Preparation of reducing agent dispersion)
<< Preparation of Reducing Agent Complex-1 Dispersion >>
Reducing agent complex-1 (1: 1 complex of 6,6′-di-t-butyl-4,4′-dimethyl-2,2′-butylidenediphenol) and triphenylphosphine oxide) 10 kg, triphenylphosphine oxide 10 kg of water was added to 16 kg of a 10 mass% aqueous solution of 0.12 kg and modified polyvinyl alcohol (Kuraray Co., Ltd., Poval MP203), and mixed well to obtain a slurry. This slurry was fed with a diaphragm pump and dispersed for 4 hours 30 minutes in a horizontal sand mill (UVM-2: manufactured by Imex Corporation) filled with zirconia beads having an average diameter of 0.5 mm, and then benzoisothiazolinone sodium salt 0.2 g and water were added to prepare a reducing agent complex concentration of 22% by mass to obtain a reducing agent complex-1 dispersion. The reducing agent complex particles contained in the thus obtained reducing agent complex dispersion had a median diameter of 0.45 μm and a maximum particle diameter of 1.4 μm or less. The obtained reducing agent complex dispersion was filtered through a polypropylene filter having a pore size of 3.0 μm to remove foreign matters such as dust and stored.
[0232]
<< Preparation of Reducing Agent-2 Dispersion >>
10 mass of reducing agent-2 (6,6′-di-t-butyl-4,4′-dimethyl-2,2′-butylidenediphenol) and modified polyvinyl alcohol (Kuraray Co., Ltd., Poval MP203) 10 kg of water was added to 16 kg of% aqueous solution and mixed well to obtain a slurry. This slurry was fed with a diaphragm pump and dispersed for 3 hours 30 minutes in a horizontal sand mill (UVM-2: manufactured by Imex Co., Ltd.) filled with zirconia beads having an average diameter of 0.5 mm, and then benzoisothiazolinone sodium salt 0.2 g and water were added to prepare a reducing agent concentration of 25% by mass. This dispersion was heat-treated at 60 ° C. for 5 hours to obtain a reducing agent-2 dispersion. The reducing agent particles contained in the reducing agent dispersion thus obtained had a median diameter of 0.40 μm and a maximum particle diameter of 1.5 μm or less. The obtained reducing agent dispersion was filtered through a polypropylene filter having a pore size of 3.0 μm to remove foreign substances such as dust and stored.
[0233]
<< Preparation of hydrogen bonding compound-1 dispersion >>
Add 10 kg of water to 10 kg of an aqueous solution of 10 wt% of hydrogen bonding compound-1 (tri (4-t-butylphenyl) phosphine oxide) and denatured polyvinyl alcohol (Kuraray Co., Ltd., Poval MP203). Mix to make a slurry. This slurry was fed with a diaphragm pump, dispersed in a horizontal sand mill (UVM-2: manufactured by Imex Co., Ltd.) filled with zirconia beads having an average diameter of 0.5 mm for 3 hours 30 minutes, and then benzoisothiazolinone sodium salt 0.2 g and water were added to prepare a hydrogen bonding compound concentration of 25% by mass. This dispersion was heated at 80 ° C. for 1 hour to obtain a hydrogen bonding compound-1 dispersion. The hydrogen bonding compound particles contained in the hydrogen bonding compound dispersion thus obtained had a median diameter of 0.35 μm and a maximum particle diameter of 1.5 μm or less. The obtained hydrogen bonding compound dispersion was filtered through a polypropylene filter having a pore size of 3.0 μm to remove foreign substances such as dust and stored.
[0234]
<< Preparation of Development Accelerator-1 Dispersion >>
10 kg of development accelerator-1 and 20 kg of a 10% by weight aqueous solution of modified polyvinyl alcohol (Kuraray Co., Ltd., Poval MP203) were added with 10 kg of water and mixed well to obtain a slurry. This slurry was fed with a diaphragm pump and dispersed for 3 hours 30 minutes in a horizontal sand mill (UVM-2: manufactured by Imex Co., Ltd.) filled with zirconia beads having an average diameter of 0.5 mm, and then benzoisothiazolinone sodium salt 0.2 g and water were added to adjust the concentration of the development accelerator to 20% by mass to obtain a development accelerator-1 dispersion. The development accelerator particles contained in the development accelerator dispersion thus obtained had a median diameter of 0.48 μm and a maximum particle diameter of 1.4 μm or less. The obtained development accelerator dispersion was filtered through a polypropylene filter having a pore size of 3.0 μm to remove foreign substances such as dust and stored.
[0235]
Development accelerator-1 in the preparation of the development accelerator-1 dispersion was changed to the development accelerator-2 and the color tone adjusting agent-1, and the other development acceleration was carried out in the same manner as the preparation of the development accelerator-1 dispersion. A 20 mass% dispersion of the solid dispersion of Agent-2 and Color Toner-1 was obtained.
[0236]
(Preparation of polyhalogen compound)
<< Preparation of organic polyhalogen compound-1 dispersion >>
10 kg of organic polyhalogen compound-1 (tribromomethanesulfonylbenzene), 10 kg of a 20% by weight aqueous solution of modified polyvinyl alcohol (Poval MP203 manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd.), 0.4 kg of a 20% by weight aqueous solution of sodium triisopropylnaphthalenesulfonate, Then, 14 kg of water was added and mixed well to obtain a slurry. This slurry was fed with a diaphragm pump and dispersed for 5 hours in a horizontal sand mill (UVM-2: manufactured by Imex Co., Ltd.) filled with zirconia beads having an average diameter of 0.5 mm. 2 g and water were added to prepare an organic polyhalogen compound concentration of 26% by mass to obtain an organic polyhalogen compound-1 dispersion. The organic polyhalogen compound particles contained in the polyhalogen compound dispersion thus obtained had a median diameter of 0.41 μm and a maximum particle diameter of 2.0 μm or less. The obtained organic polyhalogen compound dispersion was filtered through a polypropylene filter having a pore size of 10.0 μm to remove foreign substances such as dust and stored.
[0237]
<< Preparation of organic polyhalogen compound-2 dispersion >>
10 kg of organic polyhalogen compound-2 (N-butyl-3-tribromomethanesulfonylbenzoamide), 20 kg of a 10% by weight aqueous solution of modified polyvinyl alcohol (Poval MP203 manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd.), and 20 of sodium triisopropylnaphthalenesulfonate 0.4 kg of a mass% aqueous solution was added and mixed well to obtain a slurry. This slurry was fed with a diaphragm pump and dispersed for 5 hours in a horizontal sand mill (UVM-2: manufactured by Imex Co., Ltd.) filled with zirconia beads having an average diameter of 0.5 mm. 2 g and water were added to prepare an organic polyhalogen compound concentration of 30% by mass. This dispersion was heated at 40 ° C. for 5 hours to obtain an organic polyhalogen compound-2 dispersion. The organic polyhalogen compound particles contained in the polyhalogen compound dispersion thus obtained had a median diameter of 0.40 μm and a maximum particle diameter of 1.3 μm or less. The obtained organic polyhalogen compound dispersion was filtered through a polypropylene filter having a pore size of 3.0 μm to remove foreign substances such as dust and stored.
[0238]
<< Preparation of Phthalazine Compound-1 Solution >>
8 kg of modified polyvinyl alcohol MP203 manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd. was dissolved in 174.57 kg of water, and then 3.15 kg of a 20 wt% aqueous solution of sodium triisopropylnaphthalenesulfonate and 70 wt% of phthalazine compound-1 (6-isopropylphthalazine). % Aqueous solution 14.28 kg was added to prepare a 5 mass% solution of phthalazine compound-1.
[0239]
(Preparation of mercapto compound)
<< Preparation of Mercapto Compound-1 Aqueous Solution >>
7 g of mercapto compound-1 (1- (3-sulfophenyl) -5-mercaptotetrazole sodium salt) was dissolved in 993 g of water to obtain a 0.7% by mass aqueous solution.
[0240]
<< Preparation of Mercapto Compound-2 Aqueous Solution >>
20 g of mercapto compound-2 (1- (3-methylureido) -5-mercaptotetrazole sodium salt) was dissolved in 980 g of water to obtain a 2.0 mass% aqueous solution.
[0241]
<< Preparation of Pigment-1 Dispersion >>
C. I. Pigment Blue 60 (64 g) and Kao Corp. demole N (6.4 g) were added to 250 g of water and mixed well to prepare a slurry. Prepare 800 g of zirconia beads having an average diameter of 0.5 mm, put them in a vessel together with the slurry, and disperse with a disperser (1/4 G sand grinder mill: manufactured by IMEX Co., Ltd.) for 25 hours. Obtained. The pigment particles contained in the pigment dispersion thus obtained had an average particle size of 0.21 μm.
[0242]
<< Preparation of SBR Latex Liquid >>
The SBR latex was prepared as follows.
In a polymerization kettle of a gas monomer reactor (Pressure Glass Industry Co., Ltd., TAS-2J type), 287 g of distilled water, surfactant (Pionin A-43-S, manufactured by Takemoto Yushi Co., Ltd., solid content 48.5) %) 7.73 g, 14.06 ml of 1 mol / liter NaOH, 0.15 g of ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid tetrasodium salt, 255 g of styrene, 11.25 g of acrylic acid, 3.0 g of tert-dodecyl mercaptan, and the reaction vessel was sealed and stirred. Stir at a speed of 200 rpm. After degassing with a vacuum pump and repeating nitrogen gas replacement several times, 108.75 g of 1,3-butadiene was injected and the internal temperature was raised to 60 ° C. A solution prepared by dissolving 1.875 g of ammonium persulfate in 50 ml of water was added thereto and stirred as it was for 5 hours. The temperature was further raised to 90 ° C. and stirred for 3 hours. After completion of the reaction, the internal temperature was lowered to room temperature, and then 1 mol / liter NaOH and NH.₄Na + ion: NH with OH₄ ⁺Addition treatment was performed so that the ion was 1: 5.3 (molar ratio), and the pH was adjusted to 8.4. Thereafter, filtration is performed with a polypropylene filter having a pore size of 1.0 μm. Foreign matter such as dust was removed and stored to obtain 774.7 g of SBR latex.
When the halogen ions of the obtained SBR latex were measured by ion chromatography, the chloride ion concentration was 3 ppm. Furthermore, the result of measuring the concentration of the chelating agent by high performance liquid chromatography was 145 ppm.
[0243]
The latex has an average particle size of 90 nm, Tg of 17 ° C., a solid content of 44% by mass, an equilibrium water content of 0.6% by mass at 25 ° C. and 60%, and an ionic conductivity of 4.80 mS / cm. A conductivity meter CM-30S manufactured by Kogyo Co., Ltd. was used, and the latex stock solution (44% by mass measured at 25 ° C.) was pH 8.4.
SBR latexes having different Tg can be adjusted by the same method by appropriately changing the ratio of styrene and butadiene.
[0244]
<< Preparation of Emulsion Layer (Photosensitive Layer) Coating Solution-1A to 1Y >>
As shown in Table 2, the reducible silver salt dispersions A to Y obtained above were each 1000 g, water 276 ml, pigment-1 dispersion 33 g, organic polyhalogen compound-1 dispersion 21 g, and organic polyhalogen compound-2. 58 g of dispersion, 173 g of phthalazine compound-1 solution, 1082 g of SBR latex (Tg: 17 ° C.) liquid, 299 g of reducing agent complex-1 dispersion, 5.7 g of development accelerator-1 dispersion, 9 ml of mercapto compound-1 aqueous solution, mercapto 27 ml of Compound-2 aqueous solution was sequentially added, and 117 g of silver halide mixed emulsion A (mixed emulsion A for coating) was added immediately before coating and mixed well to prepare emulsion layer (photosensitive layer) coating solutions-1A to 1Y. did. The obtained emulsion layer coating solution was fed directly to the coating die.
The amount of zirconium in the coating solution was 0.38 mg per 1 g of silver.
[0245]
<< Preparation of Emulsion Layer (Photosensitive Layer) Coating Solution-2A, 2B, 2E, 2L >>
As shown in Table 2, the reducible silver salt dispersions A, B, E, and L obtained above were each 1000 g, water 276 ml, pigment-1 dispersion 35 g, organic polyhalogen compound-1 dispersion 32 g, organic poly 46 g of halogen compound-2 dispersion, 173 g of phthalazine compound-1 solution, 1082 g of SBR latex (Tg: 17 ° C.) liquid, 153 g of reducing agent-2 dispersion, 55 g of hydrogen bonding compound-1 dispersion, dispersion of development accelerator-1 4.8 g of the product, 5.2 g of the development accelerator-2 dispersion, 2.1 g of the color tone adjusting agent-1 dispersion, and 8 ml of the mercapto compound-2 aqueous solution were sequentially added, and the silver halide mixed emulsion A (for coating) was added immediately before coating. 140 g of mixed emulsion A) was added and mixed well to prepare emulsion layer (photosensitive layer) coating solutions-2A, 2B, 2E and 2L. The obtained emulsion layer coating solution was fed directly to the coating die.
The amount of zirconium in the coating solution was 0.25 mg per 1 g of silver.
[0246]
<Preparation of emulsion surface intermediate layer coating solution>
Polyvinyl alcohol PVA-205 (manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd.) 1000 g, pigment 5 mass% dispersion 272 g, methyl methacrylate / styrene / butyl acrylate / hydroxyethyl methacrylate / acrylic acid copolymer (copolymerization weight ratio 64/9/20 / 5/2) 27% 5% aqueous solution of aerosol OT (manufactured by American Cyanamid Co., Ltd.) in 4200 ml of 19% by weight latex, 135 ml of 20% by weight aqueous solution of diammonium phthalate, total amount 10000g Add water and adjust with NaOH so that the pH is 7.5 to obtain an intermediate layer coating solution, 9.1 ml / m²Then, the solution was fed to the coating die.
The viscosity of the coating solution was 58 [mPa · s] at a B-type viscometer of 40 ° C. (No. 1 rotor, 60 rpm).
[0247]
<< Preparation of emulsion surface protective layer first layer coating solution >>
Inert gelatin (64 g) is dissolved in water, and methyl methacrylate / styrene / butyl acrylate / hydroxyethyl methacrylate / acrylic acid copolymer latex (copolymerization weight ratio 64/9/20/5/2) 19.0 mass% liquid 112 g, 30 ml of 15% by weight methanol solution of phthalic acid, 23 ml of 10% by weight aqueous solution of 4-methylphthalic acid, 28 ml of sulfuric acid having a concentration of 0.5 mol / L, and 5% by weight aqueous solution of Aerosol OT (American Cyanamid Co., Ltd.) Add 5 ml, 0.5 g phenoxyethanol, 0.1 g benzoisothiazolinone, add water to make a total amount of 750 g, and use 26 ml of 4% by weight chromium alum mixed with a static mixer just before coating. 18.6 ml / m²Then, the solution was fed to the coating die.
The viscosity of the coating solution was 20 [mPa · s] at a B-type viscometer of 40 ° C. (No. 1 rotor, 60 rpm).
[0248]
<< Preparation of emulsion surface protective layer second layer coating solution >>
Inert gelatin (80 g) is dissolved in water, and methyl methacrylate / styrene / butyl acrylate / hydroxyethyl methacrylate / acrylic acid copolymer (copolymerization weight ratio 64/9/20/5/2) 27.5% by weight of latex 102 g, 5.4 ml of a 2% by weight solution of a fluorosurfactant (F-1), 5.4 ml of a 2% by weight solution of a fluorosurfactant (F-2), Aerosol OT (American Cyanamid Co., Ltd.) ) 23 ml, 4 g of polymethyl methacrylate fine particles (average particle size 0.7 μm), 21 g of polymethyl methacrylate fine particles (average particle size 4.5 μm), 1.6 g of 4-methylphthalic acid, 4.8 g of phthalic acid Water was added to 44 ml of 0.5 mol / L sulfuric acid and 10 mg of benzoisothiazolinone to a total amount of 650 g. A solution obtained by mixing 445 ml of an aqueous solution containing an amount of chromium alum and 0.67% by mass of phthalic acid with a static mixer immediately before coating is used as the surface protective layer coating solution, and 8.3 ml / m.²Then, the solution was fed to the coating die.
The viscosity of the coating solution was 19 [mPa · s] at a B-type viscometer of 40 ° C. (No. 1 rotor, 60 rpm).
[0249]
<< Preparation of Photothermographic Material-1-25 >>
An anti-halation layer coating solution is applied on the back surface side of the undercoat support with a gelatin coating amount of 0.44 g / m.²In addition, the back surface protective layer coating solution has a gelatin coating amount of 1.7 g / m.²Then, a simultaneous multilayer coating was applied and dried to prepare a back layer.
[0250]
A photothermographic material sample was prepared on the surface opposite to the back surface by simultaneous multi-layer coating using the slide bead coating method in the order of the emulsion layer, intermediate layer, protective layer first layer, and protective layer second layer from the undercoat surface. . At this time, the emulsion layer and the intermediate layer were adjusted to 31 ° C., the protective layer first layer was adjusted to 36 ° C., and the protective layer second layer was adjusted to 37 ° C.
[0251]
In addition, the emulsion layer is coated with each compound (g / m²) Was applied so that the coating amount was as follows.

[0252]
The coating was performed at a speed of 160 m / min, the gap between the coating die tip and the support was set to 0.10 to 0.30 mm, and the pressure in the decompression chamber was set to be 196 to 882 Pa lower than the atmospheric pressure. The support was neutralized with an ion wind before coating.
In the subsequent chilling zone, after cooling the coating solution with wind at a dry bulb temperature of 10 to 20 ° C., the coating solution is transported in a non-contact manner, and dried at a dry bulb temperature of 23 to 45 ° C. It dried with the dry wind of the wet bulb temperature 15-21 degreeC.
After drying, the humidity was adjusted at 25 ° C. and humidity of 40 to 60%, and then the film surface was heated to 70 to 90 ° C. After heating, the film surface was cooled to 25 ° C.
The total thickness of the photosensitive layer (emulsion layer) and the total thickness of the photosensitive layer and the non-photosensitive layer (intermediate layer, protective layer first layer, protective layer second layer) are shown in Table 2. It is as described in.
[0253]
(Preparation of photothermographic materials 26 to 29 of the present invention)
In the preparation of the photothermographic materials 1 to 25, the emulsion layer coating solutions -1A to 1Y were changed to 2A, 2B, 2E, and 2L, and the yellow dye compound-1 was further removed from the antihalation layer. Except for changing the fluorosurfactant of the emulsion surface protective layer coating solution from F-1 and F-2 to F-3 and F-4, respectively, the same as in the photothermographic materials 1 to 25, Photothermographic materials 26 to 29 were prepared.
[0254]
In addition, the emulsion layer has a coating amount of each compound (g / m²) Was applied so that the coating amount was as follows.

[0255]
[Table 2]

[0256]
The chemical structures of the compounds used in the examples of the present invention are shown below.
[0257]
Embedded image

[0258]
Embedded image

[0259]
Embedded image

[0260]
Embedded image

[0261]
Embedded image

[0262]
[Evaluation of performance]
Each obtained sample was cut into half-cut sizes, packaged in the following packaging materials in an environment of 25 ° C. and 50%, and stored at room temperature for 2 weeks.
[0263]
[Packaging materials]
PET 10 μm / PE 12 μm / aluminum foil 9 μm / Ny 15 μm / polyethylene 50 μm containing 3% carbon.
Oxygen permeability: 0 ml / atm · m²・ 25 ℃ ・ day, moisture permeability: 0g / atm ・ m²・ 25 ℃ ・ day
[0264]
The stored samples were exposed and heat developed with Fuji Medical Dry Laser Imager FM-DPL (with a 660 nm semiconductor laser with a maximum output of 60 mW (IIIB)) (112 ° C-119 ° C-121 ° C-121 ° C). Using a panel heater, the photothermographic materials 1 to 25 were 24 seconds in total, and the photothermographic materials 26 to 29 were 14 seconds in total. The images described below were evaluated with a densitometer.
[0265]
(sensitivity)
The exposure amount necessary to obtain the fog plus blackening density 1.0 of each photothermographic material prepared above is obtained, the reciprocal thereof is calculated, and the fog plus blackening density 1.0 of the photothermographic material 1 is obtained. The relative value with the reciprocal of the exposure amount necessary to obtain as 100 is shown. The results are shown in Table 3. In addition, it shows that a sensitivity is so high that a numerical value is large.
[0266]
(Evaluation of raw preservation)
The photothermographic material produced above was cut into half-cut sizes and stored for 1 week in an environment of 35 ° C. and 60%, and then the sensitivity was evaluated under the same conditions as in the sensitivity evaluation. The raw storage stability was evaluated from the magnitude of the decrease in sensitivity after 1 week storage compared to the sensitivity before 1 week storage. The results are shown in Table 3. The smaller the decrease in sensitivity, the better the raw storage stability.
[0267]
(Evaluation of image preservation)
The photothermographic material after the above heat development was placed in a room at 25 ° C. and 60% and allowed to stand for 30 days under a 100 lux fluorescent lamp, and the fog density was measured. Table 3 shows the change (increase) in the density of the fogged part after storage for 30 days under the above conditions with respect to the fog density immediately after heat development. The larger the increase in the density of the fog portion immediately after the heat development processing after storage for 30 days under the above conditions, the worse the image storability. That is, the increase in fog is small even when left under the above conditions. It shows excellent image storage stability.
[0268]
(Processability evaluation)
The lower blade is fixed to the obtained sample using an upper blade with a 1 ° palm angle and a 89 ° edge angle and a lower blade with a 0 ° edge angle of 90 ° and the cutting speed of the upper blade is reduced. Was cut at 1 m / sec. Both cut surfaces of the cut sample were observed with an optical microscope at a magnification of 100 to evaluate workability.
Evaluation,
A: No film peeling occurs and the cut surface is smooth
○: No film peeling but rough surface
Δ: The film is peeled off, but it remains without peeling even after rubbing by hand, and there is no practical problem.
X: The film peels off and is peeled off by hand.
[0269]
[Table 3]

[0270]
The results in Table 3 show that the photothermographic material of the present invention is excellent in raw storability, image storability after heat development, and processability.
[0271]
【The invention's effect】
The present invention can provide a photothermographic material having improved processability, raw storability, and image storability after development, and an image forming method using the same.

Claims (9)

Thermal development having a photosensitive silver halide layer containing at least a photosensitive silver halide, an organic silver salt, a reducing agent for the organic silver salt, and a binder, and a non-photosensitive layer on the same surface of the support In photosensitive materials,
The organic silver salt is a non-photosensitive polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt having a molecular weight per mole of silver of 410 or less,
The photothermographic material is characterized in that the total thickness of the photosensitive silver halide layer and the non-photosensitive layer is 5 μm or more and 20 μm or less. 2. The photothermographic material according to claim 1, wherein the total thickness of the photosensitive silver halide layer and the non-photosensitive layer is 7 μm or more and 16 μm or less. 3. The photothermographic material according to claim 1, wherein the photosensitive silver halide layer has a thickness of 3 to 15 [mu] m. The photothermographic material according to claim 1, wherein the photosensitive silver halide layer has a thickness of 5 μm to 12 μm. The total silver amount of the photosensitive silver halide and the non-photosensitive polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt per 1 m ^{2 of the} photothermographic material is 0.5 g or more and 1.9 g or less. 5. The photothermographic material according to any one of 1 to 4. 6. The photothermographic material according to claim 1, wherein the non-photosensitive polyvalent carboxylic acid silver salt is a compound represented by the following general formula (1).
_{^{M 1 O 2 C-L 1}} -CO 2 M 2 Formula (1)
(In the general formula (1), L ¹ represents an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, an alkynylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an arylene group, a divalent heterocyclic group, —C (═O) —, —O—, —S—, R ¹ represents a divalent group selected from —S (═O) —, —S (═O) ₂ —, and —N (R ¹ ) —, or a combination thereof. A hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group or a sulfonyl group is represented.
M ¹ and M ² represent a hydrogen atom or a counter ion, and at least one of M ¹ and M ² represents a silver (I) ion. The compound represented by the general formula (1) may further have a carboxyl group or a salt thereof. ) 7. The photothermographic material according to claim 6, wherein, in the general formula (1), L ¹ is a group having at least one aromatic group. In an image forming method comprising: an exposure step of scanning and exposing a heat-developable photosensitive material based on image information; and a development step of thermally developing the scan-exposed photothermographic material.
The development step is a step of heat treatment at a temperature of 80 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower for 5 seconds or longer and 20 seconds or shorter
An image forming method, wherein the photothermographic material is the photothermographic material according to claim 1. The image forming method according to claim 8, wherein the developing step is a step of performing heat treatment at a temperature of 100 ° C. to 135 ° C. for 7 seconds to 15 seconds.